Converted from en_tn_54-2TH.tsv to tn_2TH.tsv

Signed-off-by: unfoldingWord <info@unfoldingword.org>
This commit is contained in:
unfoldingWord 2022-12-16 21:29:03 +00:00
parent edd328bb1c
commit 564d852485
2 changed files with 198 additions and 198 deletions

View File

@ -1,198 +0,0 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
2TH front intro krd6 0 # Introduction to 2 Thessalonians<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the book of 2 Thessalonians<br><br>1. Greetings and thanksgiving (1:12)<br>1. Believers suffer from persecution (1:312)<br> * God uses persecution to increase faith, love, and endurance in believers (1:34)<br> * God is just: (1:512)<br> * God will make believers worthy of his kingdom<br> * God will give relief to believers<br> * God will punish those who persecute believers<br>1. Some believers misunderstand about the second coming of Christ (2:112)<br> * Christs return has not yet happened (2:12)<br> * Instruction about the events that will precede the return of Christ (2:312)<br>1. Pauls confidence that God will save the Thessalonian believers (2:1317)<br> * Paul calls the Thessalonian believers to “stand firm” (2:1315)<br> * Paul prays that God will comfort them (2:1617)<br>1. Paul requests that the Thessalonian believers pray for him (3:15)<br>1. Paul give commands about idle believers (3:615)<br>1. Closing (3:1617)<br><br>### Who wrote 2 Thessalonians?<br><br>Paul wrote 2 Thessalonians. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted believers. After he became a believer, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.<br><br>Paul is the author of this letter, but he includes Silvanus and Timothy as senders of the letter. Paul wrote this letter while he, Silvanus, and Timothy were staying in the city of Corinth.<br><br>### What is the book of 2 Thessalonians about?<br><br>Paul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He encouraged the believers because they were being persecuted. He told them to continue living in a way that pleased God. He also wanted to teach them again about Christs return. He also warned them that they should not be idle but should work as they wait for Christ to return.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Thessalonians” or “Second Thessalonians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Pauls Second Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The Second Letter to the Christians/believers in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?<br><br>Paul wrote much in this letter about Jesus eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation. And he will cause there to be peace everywhere. Paul also explained that a “man of lawlessness” will come before Christs return. This person will obey Satan and cause many people to oppose God. But Jesus will destroy this person when he returns.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?<br><br>Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.<br><br>### How are pronouns used in this letter?<br><br>In this letter, the words “we” and “us” refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. If your language differentiates between inclusive and exclusive pronouns, use an exclusive pronoun for these. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])<br><br>In this letter, the words “you” and “your” are plural and refer to the Thessalonian believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the book of 2 Thessalonians?<br><br>For the following verses, some ancient manuscripts have a different reading than others. The ULT follows the reading that scholars consider to be the most accurate and puts the other reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in your area that your people are familiar with, consider using the reading that it follows. If not, translators are advised to follow the reading in the ULT.<br>* “and the man of lawlessness is revealed” (2:3). The ULT, UST, and most modern versions read this way. Other versions follow the reading, “and the man of sin is revealed.”<br>* “For God chose you as the firstfruits for salvation” (2:13) The ULT, UST, and some other versions read this way. The other reading is, “For God chose you from the first/beginning for salvation.”<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
2TH 1 intro m987 0 # 2 Thessalonians 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>Verses 12 formally introduce this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type in which the sender identified himself, then the recipient, then gave a greeting.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible.<br><br>A paradox occurs in verses 45 where Paul talks about the Thessalonian believers faithfulness through persecution as “evidence of the righteous judgment of God.” People would not normally think that believing in God while being persecuted is a sign of Gods righteous judgment. But the fact that God gave them the ability to persevere in their faith is evidence that God claims them as his own and will judge them as worthy of his kingdom. In verses 510, Paul goes on to explain more of Gods righteous judgment, that God will reward those who believe in him and that he will punish those who afflict his people. ([2 Thessalonians 1:45](./04.md))<br><br>Another paradox occurs in verse 9 where Paul describes the penalty for rejecting God as “eternal destruction.” Normally when something is destroyed it ceases to exist. But in this case, the people who reject God will experience eternal separation from God, as the verse goes on to explain. Being separated from God destroys all that was enjoyable about their lives, and this continuous destruction is what they experience through eternity. ([2 Thessalonians 1:9](../01/09.md))
2TH 1 1 hm3e translate-names Σιλουανὸς 1 Silvanus **Silvanus** is the Latin form of “Silas.” **Silvanus** is the name of a man, the same person listed in the book of Acts as Pauls fellow traveler. If your readers may not know that these two are the same person, you could use the name “Silas” in the text and “Silvanus” in the footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2TH 1 1 ge00 figs-ellipsis Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος; τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 You may want to fill in the words necessary to make this a complete sentence. Alternate translation: “Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy send this letter to the church” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis)
2TH 1 1 l8q8 figs-explicit Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος 1 Although **Paul** wrote this letter, he identifies **Silvanus and Timothy** as also sending it. This means that they were with him and were in agreement with it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make that clear, as in the UST. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit)
2TH 1 1 eajo figs-metaphor ἐν Θεῷ Πατρὶ ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ 1 Here Paul speaks of the believers as though they were occupying space inside of God and Jesus. This metaphor expresses the idea that believers are spiritually united to God and Jesus. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “united to God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” or “sharing life with God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
2TH 1 2 g6rb translate-blessing χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Grace to you Many languages have different ways to offer good wishes as they greet. Paul greeted his letter recipients with a blessing. Use a form that would be a good wish or blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “We pray that God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ give you grace and peace” or “I wish you grace and peace from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” or “May the grace and peace of God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ be your portion” or “May God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ show grace and give peace to your hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
2TH 1 2 bv9m figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **Grace** and **peace**, you can express these ideas as verbs or in another way. Alternate translation: “May God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ be gracious to you and give rest to your inner being” or “...be favorable to you and make you at ease” or “...be kind to you and set your heart at rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TH 1 3 o6v9 checking/headings 0 General Information: In verses 312, Paul gives thanks for the believers in Thessalonica and prays for them. A heading for this section might be, “Thanks and Prayers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]])
2TH 1 3 m6z5 εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν & πάντοτε 1 General Information: Paul here uses the word **ought** to express that he has a moral obligation to God to **give thanks** for the believers in Thessalonica. Use a natural expression for this in your language. Alternate translation: “We are bound always to thank” or “We can do no other than to thank” or “We must give thanks continually to”
2TH 1 3 ea59 figs-hyperbole εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε 1 We ought always to give thanks to God Paul uses **always** as a generalization meaning “often” or “regularly.” Alternate translation: “We should often give thanks to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2TH 1 3 o01t figs-explicit εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε περὶ ὑμῶν, ἀδελφοί 1 If your readers might think that Paul is expressing an obligation only and that he does not actually pray for the Thessalonians, you could express the reality explicitly. Alternate translation: “We always thank God for you, brothers, as we ought” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TH 1 3 h6t9 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. If your readers understand that it is addressed only to men, you may need to use both the masculine and the feminine forms of that word in your language. If you use a nonfigurative word such as “believers”, see that both the genders are addressed. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2TH 1 3 ezaf writing-pronouns καθὼς ἄξιόν ἐστιν 1 If it is difficult to express **just as it is fitting** in your language or if it is unclear what **it** refers to, consider starting a new sentence here to state it clearly. Alternate translation: “When we give thanks for you we are doing the right thing” or “Giving thanks for you is right for us to be doing” or “ & is the right thing to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2TH 1 3 emu9 figs-abstractnouns ὑπεραυξάνει ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you can express this idea as a verb. Alternate translation: “you believe in Christ more and more” or “you increasingly trust in Christ” or “you rely on Christ more each day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TH 1 3 xy7k figs-abstractnouns πλεονάζει ἡ ἀγάπη ἑνὸς ἑκάστου, πάντων ὑμῶν, εἰς ἀλλήλους 1 the love of each one of you all for one another is increasing If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you can express this idea as a verb. Alternate translation: “each of you sincerely loves one another more and more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TH 1 3 bmn6 figs-rpronouns ἀλλήλους 1 one another Here, **one another** means fellow believers. Alternate translation: “each other” or “each believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2TH 1 4 kx1n figs-rpronouns αὐτοὺς ἡμᾶς 1 we ourselves Here, **ourselves** is added to **we** to emphasize that even the apostle Paul and his associates are boasting about the Thessalonian believers. Alternate translation: “even we” or “we are the ones who” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns)
2TH 1 4 gcth figs-abstractnouns τῆς ὑπομονῆς ὑμῶν, καὶ πίστεως 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **endurance** and **faith** or if it is unclear how these two terms relate, you can express these same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how you patiently continue to trust in Jesus” or “how you persevere in believing in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TH 1 4 qlo9 figs-doublet ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς διωγμοῖς ὑμῶν, καὶ ταῖς θλίψεσιν 1 The two words **persecutions** and **afflictions** are saying very similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize how difficult life has been for the Thessalonian believers. If two words are difficult to find in your language or if your language does not use repetition in this way, you can use one word with this meaning and make the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “as you have been going through all these very difficult times” or “as people make you suffer in all the ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2TH 1 4 md0d figs-explicit πίστεως ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς διωγμοῖς ὑμῶν 1 Here, **faith in all your persecutions** does not mean to believe in or trust in persecutions. If your readers might be confused by that, you could express it more clearly. Alternate translation: “faith in Jesus Christ during all the times you are persecuted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TH 1 5 rs3b figs-explicit ἔνδειγμα τῆς δικαίας κρίσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰς τὸ καταξιωθῆναι ὑμᾶς 1 The **evidence** that Paul is referring to here is the faithful endurance of the Thessalonian believers while suffering persecution, which he mentioned in verse 4. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. It may also be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Your endurance while suffering is a clear indication of Gods righteous judgment, that he considers you worthy” or “Your faithfulness through persecution shows that God is just and right to consider you worthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TH 1 5 dad9 figs-activepassive εἰς τὸ καταξιωθῆναι ὑμᾶς τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 for you to be considered worthy of the kingdom of God You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that God will consider you worthy to be part of his kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TH 1 5 xm2g figs-explicit ὑπὲρ ἧς καὶ πάσχετε 1 Here, **also** could mean: (1) the Thessalonian believers are suffering for the kingdom of God as well as being counted worthy of it. Alternate translation: “being a part of which is also the reason that you are suffering” (2) the Thessalonian believers are suffering along with other believers. Alternate translation: “which is why you are going through sufferings along with many others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TH 1 6 cxx1 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴπερ δίκαιον παρὰ Θεῷ 1 if indeed it is righteous for God Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you know that God is just” or “for God is certainly right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2TH 1 6 id3i figs-metaphor παρὰ Θεῷ, ἀνταποδοῦναι τοῖς θλίβουσιν ὑμᾶς θλῖψιν 1 for God to return affliction to those who are afflicting you Here, **to return** means to cause someone to experience the same thing that they did to someone else as though the same action were bouncing back onto the people who did that action. Use a natural expression for this kind of reciprocal action. Alternate translation: “for God to afflict those who are afflicting you” or “for God to pay back those who are afflicting you” “for God to do the same to those who are afflicting you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TH 1 6 zemk figs-abstractnouns ἀνταποδοῦναι τοῖς θλίβουσιν ὑμᾶς θλῖψιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **affliction**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to afflict those who are afflicting you” or “to trouble those who are troubling you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TH 1 7 hxy2 figs-ellipsis καὶ ὑμῖν & ἄνεσιν 1 and relief to you The words **and relief to you** continue the description of what God is right “to return” to people (verse 6). If this would not be understood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and it is righteous for God to give relief to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2TH 1 7 l3ht writing-pronouns καὶ ὑμῖν τοῖς θλιβομένοις, ἄνεσιν μεθ’ ἡμῶν 1 Here, **you who are being afflicted** refers to the Thessalonian believers, and **us** refers to Paul and his associates. Other people are afflicting both groups because of their faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “and relief to you who are being afflicted just as we are being afflicted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2TH 1 7 knbb figs-abstractnouns ὑμῖν & ἄνεσιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **relief**, you can express this idea with a verb or in another way. Alternate translation: “to relieve you” or “to rescue you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TH 1 7 bcxy figs-activepassive τοῖς θλιβομένοις 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom other people are afflicting” or “from the affliction that others are causing you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TH 1 7 fh5g figs-explicit ἐν τῇ ἀποκαλύψει τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, **at the revealing** is an indication of the time when the suffering believers will have relief from their suffering. Alternate translation: “at the time when the Lord Jesus is revealed” or “when everyone sees the Lord Jesus coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TH 1 8 p1ie figs-abstractnouns διδόντος ἐκδίκησιν τοῖς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **vengeance**, you can express this idea in another way. Since this is part of Gods justice, do not use a word that implies that God is doing something illegal or inappropriate. Alternate translation: “punishing the people” or “judging the ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TH 1 8 ynt4 figs-explicit τοῖς μὴ εἰδόσι Θεὸν 1 Here, **the ones not having known God** refers to those who have refused the relationship with God that he had offered to them. Alternate translation: “on those who did not want to know God” or “on those who have rejected God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TH 1 8 gv0v figs-explicit καὶ τοῖς μὴ ὑπακούουσιν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1 The phrase, **not obeying the gospel** could refer to: (1) the same people as **those not having known God**. Alternate translation: “and who are not obeying the gospel” (2) a separate group. Alternate translation: “and also on those who are not obeying the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TH 1 8 m37v figs-idiom ὑπακούουσιν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1 The phrase, **obeying the gospel** is an idiom that means to live according to everything that God tells us in the gospel message. Alternate translation: “living according to the message of the gospel” or “heeding the admonitions that are part of the gospel message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2TH 1 8 dkkx figs-possession τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the general possessive form **of our Lord Jesus** to describe **the gospel**. The specific meaning here is that the gospel is about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the gospel that is about our Lord Jesus” or “the gospel message that tells us about our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2TH 1 9 plw5 writing-pronouns οἵτινες δίκην τίσουσιν 1 who will pay the penalty—eternal destruction Here, **who** refers to the people who are not obeying the gospel, not to the Lord Jesus. You may prefer to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Those people will pay the penalty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2TH 1 9 peog figs-abstractnouns οἵτινες δίκην τίσουσιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of the word **penalty**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who will be punished by God” or “whom God will punish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TH 1 9 ebf1 figs-idiom δίκην τίσουσιν 1 Here, the phrase **pay the penalty** is an idiom meaning to suffer the consequences of doing something bad. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “will suffer the consequences” or “will undergo the retribution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2TH 1 9 yruv figs-abstractnouns ὄλεθρον αἰώνιον 1 Here, **eternal destruction** further describes the **penalty** that people will experience if they refuse to “obey the gospel.” The **destruction** that these people will experience is **eternal**, that is, it never ends. Therefore, do not translate with the meaning that these people will cease to exist. They will continue to exist, but continually experience the ruin of their lives. If necessary, put this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “God will punish them eternally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TH 1 9 qhta figs-idiom ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Here, **the face of the Lord** is an idiom meaning the presence of the Lord. Alternate translation: “away from our Lord Jesus” or “separated from the presence of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2TH 1 9 htqg figs-possession τῆς δόξης τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ 1 Here, the possessive form is describing **power** that has **glory**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “glorious” to describe the **power**. Alternate translation: “his glorious power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2TH 1 9 wmdm figs-abstractnouns τῆς δόξης τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **glory** and **power**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “experiencing how magnificent and powerful he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TH 1 10 ugk9 figs-explicit ὅταν ἔλθῃ & ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ 1 when he comes on that day Here, **that day** is the day when Jesus will return to the world. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the day when Jesus returns to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TH 1 10 bi2u figs-activepassive ἐνδοξασθῆναι ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις αὐτοῦ, καὶ θαυμασθῆναι ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς πιστεύσασιν 1 to be glorified by his saints and to be marveled at by all those who have believed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as his saints glorify him and all those who have believed marvel at him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TH 1 10 wsvb grammar-connect-logic-result ἐνδοξασθῆναι ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις αὐτοῦ, καὶ θαυμασθῆναι 1 Here, the two verbs **to be glorified**and **to be marveled at** indicate the result of Jesus coming, not the purpose. Use a connector here that indicates result. Alternate translation: “as his saints glorify him and all those who have believed marvel at him” or “with the result that his saints will glorify him and all those who have believed will marvel at him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2TH 1 10 z1hg ἐνδοξασθῆναι ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις αὐτοῦ, καὶ θαυμασθῆναι ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς πιστεύσασιν 1 The **saints** and **the ones having believed** are one group of people, not two. If your readers might be confused by this, you could combine these into one phrase. Alternate translation: “with the result that all of his saints, that is, the believers, will glorify him and marvel at him” or “as all of his people glorify him and marvel at him”
2TH 1 10 e56p figs-activepassive ἐπιστεύθη τὸ μαρτύριον ἡμῶν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you have believed our witness when we shared it with you” or “when we testified about the saving power of Jesus Christ, you believed what we said” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive)
2TH 1 11 zy14 grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς ὃ 1 Here, **For this** connects verse 11 to verse 10, so that verse 11 gives the means or method (prayer for the Thessalonian believers) for reaching the purpose that verse 10 has just described (for Jesus to “be glorified & and marveled at”). Use a natural way in your language for introducing this relationship. Alternate translation: “This is why” or “To this end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2TH 1 11 ik19 figs-hyperbole καὶ προσευχόμεθα πάντοτε περὶ ὑμῶν 1 we also pray always for you Paul is using **always** as an exaggeration in order to emphasize how often he prays for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “we also pray regularly for you” or “we continue to pray for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2TH 1 11 hiv9 figs-explicit τῆς κλήσεως 1 of your calling Here, **calling** refers to God appointing or choosing people to belong to him and to proclaim his message of salvation through Jesus. Alternate translation: “to appoint you to belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TH 1 11 r8gk figs-abstractnouns πληρώσῃ πᾶσαν εὐδοκίαν ἀγαθωσύνης, καὶ ἔργον πίστεως ἐν δυνάμει 1 he may fulfill every desire of goodness If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **desire**, **goodness**, **faith**, and **power**, you can express these ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “he may make you able to do all of the good things that you want to do because you trust in Jesus and because God is powerful” or “he may empower you to act on what you believe in order to do good things in every way that you desire, because God is powerful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TH 1 11 c7o6 figs-ellipsis καὶ πληρώσῃ 1 Here, **and he may fulfill** adds another reason why Paul and his associates **pray always** for the Thessalonian believers. This part of the sentence assumes some of the words from earlier in the sentence. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the earlier part of the sentence. Alternate translation: “and we also pray so that he may fulfill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2TH 1 12 nvth grammar-connect-logic-goal ὅπως 1 Here, **so that** introduces the purpose for which Paul and his associates pray all of the things mentioned in verse 11. It is a repetition of the same purpose that was given in verse 10, using similar words. Alternate translation: “and we also pray so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2TH 1 12 c6ec figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, **the name of our Lord Jesus** stands for the person of the Lord Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the reputation of our Lord Jesus” or “our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TH 1 12 q994 figs-activepassive ὅπως ἐνδοξασθῇ τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ, ἐν ὑμῖν 1 so that the name of our Lord Jesus might be glorified in you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. This could mean: (1) the Thessalonian believers will glorify Jesus. Alternate translation: “so that you would glorify the name of our Lord Jesus” (2) others will glorify Jesus because of what he has done for the Thessalonian believers. Alternate translation: “so that people would glorify the name of our Lord Jesus because of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TH 1 12 pg2i figs-activepassive καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν αὐτῷ 1 and you in him If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and Jesus might glorify you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TH 1 12 l4l1 figs-ellipsis καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν αὐτῷ 1 The phrase **and you in him** leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could make a complete sentence by supplying these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and so that you might be glorified in him” or “and so that he might glorify you” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis)
2TH 1 12 z8k9 figs-abstractnouns κατὰ τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν 1 according to the grace of our God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to how exceedingly kind our God and the Lord Jesus Christ are to you” or “as our God and the Lord Jesus Christ continue to abundantly bless you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TH 1 12 z1my τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 The phrase translated as **our God and the Lord Jesus Christ** could refer to: (1) two persons of the Trinity, God the Father and Jesus the Son. (2) one person, Jesus, who is both God and Lord. Alternate translation: “of our God and Lord, Jesus Christ”
2TH 2 intro jq9r 0 # 2 Thessalonians 2 General Notes<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Man of lawlessness<br><br>This person is also called “the son of destruction” and “the lawless one” in this chapter. He is not Satan, but he is empowered by Satan and is the leader of those who do Satans evil work in the world in the last days. He is certainly one of the “antichrists” mentioned by John (1 John 2:18) and may be the final one, described as a beast in Revelation 13. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]])<br><br>### Sits in the temple of God<br><br>Paul could be referring to the Jerusalem temple that the Romans destroyed several years after he wrote this letter. Or he could be referring to a future physical temple, or to the church as the spiritual temple of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TH 2 1 r36t checking/headings 0 General Information: In verses 112, Paul exhorts believers not to be deceived about the day Jesus will come back and warns them about the coming man of lawlessness. A heading for this section might be, “The Man of Lawlessness” or “The Deception before Jesus Returns.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]])
2TH 2 1 q1uq grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Now The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2TH 2 1 uy4z grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ὑπὲρ τῆς παρουσίας τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἡμῶν ἐπισυναγωγῆς ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 The **coming of our Lord Jesus Christ** and **our gathering to him** are two actions that happen at the same time. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “regarding the time of our Lord Jesus coming when we will be gathered together unto him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
2TH 2 1 sx2f figs-activepassive ὑπὲρ τῆς παρουσίας τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἡμῶν ἐπισυναγωγῆς ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 If it is more natural in your language, you could use active verbs for the events of **coming** and **gathering**. Alternate translation: “about the time when our Lord Jesus will come and gather us to himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TH 2 1 cvg5 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2TH 2 2 b8b2 figs-doublenegatives εἰς τὸ μὴ ταχέως σαλευθῆναι ὑμᾶς ἀπὸ τοῦ νοὸς 1 for you not to be quickly shaken in your mind nor to be troubled The phrase **shaken in your mind** refers to a persons thoughts being unsettled. You could also express this positively. Alternate translation: “for you to remain firm in your thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2TH 2 2 fj52 figs-doublenegatives μηδὲ θροεῖσθαι 1 The phrase **to be troubled** refers to a persons emotions being unsettled. You could also express this positively. Alternate translation: “and remain peaceful when a message comes” or “and keep calm when you hear something” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2TH 2 2 d334 figs-ellipsis μήτε διὰ πνεύματος, μήτε διὰ λόγου, μήτε δι’ ἐπιστολῆς, ὡς δι’ ἡμῶν 1 by a spirit, nor by a word, nor by a letter as if from us Paul is leaving out some words here that might be necessary in your language. If it is helpful, you could supply these words. Alternate translation: “when you receive a message either by means of a spirit or by means of a spoken word or by means of a written letter that pretends to be coming from us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2TH 2 2 ll80 figs-ellipsis ὡς δι’ ἡμῶν 1 Paul is leaving out some words here that might be necessary in your language. If it is helpful, you could supply these words. Alternate translation: “that claims to have come from us” or “trying to deceive you that it is from us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2TH 2 2 k4dk figs-ellipsis ὡς ὅτι 1 as if that Paul is leaving out some words here that might be necessary in your language. If it is helpful, you could supply these words. Alternate translation: “that talks as if” or “that falsely claims that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2TH 2 2 ib6m ἡ ἡμέρα τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the day of the Lord Here, **the day of the Lord** refers to the time when Jesus will come back to the earth for all believers.
2TH 2 3 l9c5 μή τις ὑμᾶς ἐξαπατήσῃ κατὰ μηδένα τρόπον 1 General Information: Alternate translation: “Do not permit anyone to fool you” or “Do not believe at all the wrong words that people are telling you about this”
2TH 2 3 ej66 figs-ellipsis ὅτι ἐὰν μὴ ἔλθῃ ἡ ἀποστασία πρῶτον 1 it may not come Here, Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “for the day of the Lord will not come unless the apostacy comes first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2TH 2 3 y7ch figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἀποστασία 1 the apostacy Here, **the apostacy** refers to a future time when many people will turn away from God. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express it in another way. Alternate translation: “the time when many people will rebel against God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TH 2 3 e86v figs-activepassive ἀποκαλυφθῇ ὁ ἄνθρωπος τῆς ἀνομίας 1 the man of lawlessness may be revealed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the man of lawlessness arrives” or “the man of lawlessness makes himself known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TH 2 3 jsyj figs-possession ὁ ἄνθρωπος τῆς ἀνομίας 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **man** who is characterized by **lawlessness**. By this Paul means that this man will oppose all of Gods commandments and instructions. If this is not clear in your language, you could express this another way. Alternate translation: “the lawless man” or “the man who opposes Gods rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2TH 2 3 tkg9 figs-idiom ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας 1 the son of destruction Here, **son of destruction** is an idiom meaning a person who is destined for destruction. Alternate translation: “the one who will be destroyed” or “the one whom God will destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2TH 2 3 x6p0 figs-events ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας 1 God will destroy this person some time after the events of verse 4. If it would be clearer in your language, consider moving this phrase to the end of verse 4. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
2TH 2 4 t485 figs-activepassive πάντα λεγόμενον θεὸν ἢ σέβασμα 1 everything being called god or an object of worship You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “everything that people call God or whatever they worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TH 2 4 sk8t figs-pastforfuture αὐτὸν & καθίσαι 1 Here, **he himself sits** is part of a description of the kinds of things that this person does. If it is confusing in your language to use the present tense for this, you could use the future tense, since this will happen in the future. Alternate translation: “he himself will sit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
2TH 2 4 wj33 ἀποδεικνύντα ἑαυτὸν ὅτι ἔστιν Θεός 1 showing that he himself is God Here, **showing that he himself is God** does not mean that this man is God, but only that he is displaying himself to the world as though he were God. Alternate translation: “showing himself as God” or “attempting to demonstrate to people that he himself is God”
2TH 2 5 rsz1 figs-rquestion οὐ μνημονεύετε ὅτι, ἔτι ὢν πρὸς ὑμᾶς, ταῦτα ἔλεγον ὑμῖν 1 Do you not remember … these things? Paul is not asking for information here, but is using the question form to remind the Thessalonians of what he taught when he was with them previously. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2TH 2 5 lkk7 writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 these things Here, **these things** refers to the topics that Paul mentioned in verses 3 and 4, including the rebellion against God, the man of lawlessness, and the return of Jesus on the day of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2TH 2 6 hph0 καὶ νῦν τὸ κατέχον οἴδατε 1 There are two possibilities for understanding the function of the word **now** here. (1) It goes with **the one restraining {him}**. Alternate translation: “And you know what is restraining him now” or (2) it goes with **you know**. Alternate translation: “And now you know what is restraining him”
2TH 2 6 ask4 figs-activepassive τὸ ἀποκαλυφθῆναι αὐτὸν ἐν τῷ αὐτοῦ καιρῷ 1 he is revealed in his time If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the proper time, when God will allow him to reveal himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TH 2 7 faa5 grammar-connect-logic-contrast γὰρ 1 Here, the word translated **For** serves to connect this sentence as a contrast to what Paul has said about **lawlessness**, starting in verse 3. Until here, Paul was talking about lawlessness in the future, but now he wants to clarify that people are already being lawless.Use a natural way in your language for introducing this contrast. Alternate translation: “Now” or “Actually,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2TH 2 7 si9i figs-abstractnouns τὸ & μυστήριον ἤδη ἐνεργεῖται τῆς ἀνομίας 1 mystery of lawlessness Here, **lawlessness** is characterized as a **mystery** because we cannot understand why people rebel against Gods wise instructions unless we understand the spiritual forces at work, which Paul explains here. If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you can express them in another way. Alternate translation: “people are already mysteriously rebelling against God” or “Satan is already secretly leading people to reject Gods laws, as this man will do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TH 2 7 fcu7 ὁ κατέχων 1 the one who restrains him To restrain someone is to hold him back or to keep him from doing what he wants to do. Alternate translation: “the one who has been holding him back”
2TH 2 7 bijc writing-pronouns γένηται 1 Here, **he** refers to the one who is restraining the man of lawlessness. If this is not clear to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who restrains the man of lawlessness moves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2TH 2 7 tt88 figs-metaphor ἐκ μέσου γένηται 1 Here Paul speaks of the person who is restraining the man of lawlessness as though he were standing in front of him and blocking his path. If this does not make sense in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor or you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “he stops restraining him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TH 2 8 hn67 figs-activepassive καὶ τότε ἀποκαλυφθήσεται ὁ ἄνομος 1 and then the lawless one will be revealed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and then God will allow the lawless one to show himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TH 2 8 vay9 figs-metonymy τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 with the breath of his mouth In this figure of speech, **breath** represents the power of God and **mouth** represents the spoken word of Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “by the power of his spoken word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TH 2 8 hy3y figs-parallelism ἀνελεῖ τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ, καὶ καταργήσει τῇ ἐπιφανείᾳ τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ 1 and will bring to nothing by the appearance of his coming These two phrases describe the same event. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize how much more powerful Jesus is than the man of lawlessness. If it is confusing for your readers to talk about killing someone and then bringing him to nothing, you could reverse the order of the phrases, as in the UST, or you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “will destroy by his glorious appearance and with the breath of his mouth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
2TH 2 9 sp9v figs-possession οὗ ἐστιν ἡ παρουσία, κατ’ ἐνέργειαν τοῦ Σατανᾶ 1 with all power, and signs, and false wonders Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **work** that **Satan** does. If this is not clear in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Satan will bring this man and will work through him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2TH 2 9 rikg οὗ 1 with all power, and signs, and false wonders Here, **whom** refers back to the man of lawlessness. Alternate translation: “of the man of lawlessness”
2TH 2 9 bd5m figs-hyperbole ἐν πάσῃ δυνάμει, καὶ σημείοις, καὶ τέρασιν ψεύδους 1 with all power, and signs, and false wonders Here, **all** is hyperbole. It can apply to: (1) only **power**, with the meaning “much” or “great.” Alternate translation: “with great power to do signs and false wonders” or (2) **power**, **signs**, and **wonders**, with the meaning “many kinds of.” Alternate translation: “with many kinds of power, signs, and false wonders” or (3) a combination of the two. Alternate translation: “with much power to do all kinds of signs and false wonders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2TH 2 9 kcaw figs-abstractnouns ἐν πάσῃ δυνάμει, καὶ σημείοις, καὶ τέρασιν ψεύδους 1 with all power, and signs, and false wonders If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **power**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “with very powerful signs and false wonders” or “who made him very powerful to do signs and false wonders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TH 2 9 fjfn figs-doublet καὶ σημείοις, καὶ τέρασιν ψεύδους 1 with all power, and signs, and false wonders The words **signs** and **wonders** often occur together and mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how amazing they are. If your language does not have two words for this or does not use repetition to do this, you can use one word and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “and amazing false miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2TH 2 10 tf75 figs-hyperbole πάσῃ 1 in all deceit of unrighteousness Here, **all** is hyperbole and could mean: (1) “a high degree of” or (2) “many kinds of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2TH 2 10 ippb figs-possession ἐν πάσῃ ἀπάτῃ ἀδικίας 1 in all deceit of unrighteousness Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **deceit** that results from **unrighteousness**. If the relationship of the words is not clear in your language, you could express it more explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he is so unrighteous, he will be very deceptive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2TH 2 10 b55e figs-abstractnouns ἐν πάσῃ ἀπάτῃ ἀδικίας, τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις 1 in all deceit of unrighteousness If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **deceit** and **unrighteousness**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “because he is so unrighteous, he will completely deceive those who are perishing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TH 2 10 e8hi grammar-connect-logic-result ἀνθ’ ὧν 1 in all deceit of unrighteousness What follows this phrase is the reason that the people are perishing. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason. You may want to start a new sentence here and end what came before it with a period. Alternate translation: “They are perishing because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2TH 2 10 rtua figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀγάπην τῆς ἀληθείας οὐκ ἐδέξαντο 1 in all deceit of unrighteousness If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **love** and **truth**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Also, your language might prefer an expression other than **love** for something as impersonal as **truth**. Alternate translation: “they did not want to consider the true message about Jesus to be important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TH 2 10 sl5b grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς τὸ σωθῆναι αὐτούς 1 in all deceit of unrighteousness This phrase could express: (1) the result of receiving the love of the truth. Alternate translation: “and thus be saved” or (2) the purpose of loving the truth. Alternate translation: “so that they could be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2TH 2 10 xst1 figs-activepassive εἰς τὸ σωθῆναι αὐτούς 1 in all deceit of unrighteousness If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, that would be God. Alternate translation: “for God to save them” or “so that God would save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TH 2 11 sj1v grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ τοῦτο 1 because of this What follows **because of this** is the result of the action of the people who “did not receive the love of the truth” in verse 10. Use a connector that shows that what the people did in verse 10 is the reason for what follows in this verse. Alternate translation: “for this reason” or “because the people did not receive the love of the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2TH 2 11 en8e figs-metaphor πέμπει αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς ἐνέργειαν πλάνης, εἰς τὸ πιστεῦσαι αὐτοὺς τῷ ψεύδει 1 God is sending them a working of error for them to believe the lie Paul is speaking of **God** allowing something to happen to people as if he is **sending** something to them. Alternate translation: “God is allowing them to think wrongly so that they believe the lies of the man of lawlessness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TH 2 11 u7a0 figs-possession ἐνέργειαν πλάνης 1 God is sending them a working of error for them to believe the lie Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **working** that is characterized by **error**. This means something that works to produce error in them. Alternate translation: “the ability to think in a wrong way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2TH 2 11 nass grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς τὸ πιστεῦσαι αὐτοὺς 1 God is sending them a working of error for them to believe the lie Here, **for** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God sends the **working of error**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “so that they may believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2TH 2 11 bkpm writing-pronouns εἰς τὸ πιστεῦσαι αὐτοὺς 1 God is sending them a working of error for them to believe the lie Here, **them** refers to the people who “did not receive the love of the truth” in verse 10. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that these people may believe” or “in order that the people who did not receive the love of the truth may believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2TH 2 12 x33k grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 they might all be judged This phrase introduces a purpose clause. This follows the purpose clause of verse 11, so you may want to link them together. Alternate translation: “and furthermore, so that” or “and therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2TH 2 12 d63e figs-activepassive κριθῶσιν πάντες 1 they might all be judged If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, that would be God. Alternate translation: “God may judge all of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TH 2 12 pkw8 writing-pronouns οἱ 1 those who have not believed the truth, but have taken pleasure in unrighteousness Here, **the ones** refers back to the people that Paul has described with similar terms in verse 10. These are the same people who “did not receive the love of the truth” and instead accepted the “deceit of unrighteousness.” You may want to start a new sentence here and end what came before with a period. Alternate translation: “Those are the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2TH 2 12 m1cl figs-abstractnouns οἱ μὴ πιστεύσαντες τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, ἀλλὰ εὐδοκήσαντες τῇ ἀδικίᾳ 1 those who have not believed the truth, but have taken pleasure in unrighteousness If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **truth** and **unrighteousness**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “those who have not believed the true message but have enjoyed doing sinful things” or “those people who have rejected the true message about the Lord and instead have chosen to do what is wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TH 2 13 w83a checking/headings 0 General Information: Paul now changes topics. If you are using section headings, you could put one here before verse 13. Suggested heading: “Paul gives thanks to God for the believers and encourages them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]])
2TH 2 13 b3hh δὲ 1 Now The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to indicate/show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section.
2TH 2 13 dze5 figs-hyperbole ἡμεῖς & ὀφείλομεν εὐχαριστεῖν & πάντοτε 1 we ought always to give thanks The word **always** is a generalization. This is used to emphasize the importance of the action. If this is not natural in your language, you could use the alternative renderings given. Alternate translation: “we should continually give thanks” or “we must thank God at all times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2TH 2 13 m418 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς & ὀφείλομεν 1 we ought Here, **we** refers to three men, Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy. If you have exclusive and inclusive first-person pronouns in your language, this should be an exclusive pronoun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2TH 2 13 ia4x figs-activepassive ἀδελφοὶ ἠγαπημένοι ὑπὸ Κυρίου 1 brothers having been loved by the Lord If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for the Lord loves you, brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TH 2 13 v15j figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. If your readers understand that it is addressed only to men, you may need to use both the masculine and the feminine forms of that word in your language. If you use a nonfigurative word such as “believers”, see that both the genders are addressed. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2TH 2 13 l7a8 figs-metaphor ἀπαρχὴν εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 as firstfruits for salvation in sanctification of the Spirit and belief in the truth Being among the first people to be saved is spoken of as if the Thessalonian believers were **firstfruits**. Alternate translation: “to be among the first people who believe” or “to be some of the first people whom God was saving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TH 2 13 bpqn figs-abstractnouns ἀπαρχὴν εἰς σωτηρίαν ἐν ἁγιασμῷ Πνεύματος καὶ πίστει ἀληθείας 1 as firstfruits for salvation in sanctification of the Spirit and belief in the truth If it would be clearer in your language, you could change the abstract nouns **salvation**, **sanctification**, **belief**, and **truth** into verbal forms. Alternate translation: “to be among the first people who believe what is true, and whom God has saved and set apart for himself by his Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TH 2 14 e0gy figs-ellipsis διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **through our gospel** does not mean that the gospel belongs to Paul and his companions. It refers to the gospel about Jesus that Paul and his companions preached. Alternate translation: “through the gospel that we preached to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2TH 2 14 thmh figs-explicit εἰς περιποίησιν δόξης τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 The phrase **to the acquiring of the glory of our Lord Jesus Christ** does not mean that we will take over or divide up the glory of Jesus Christ. It means that the believers will share in Christs glory. Alternate translation: “so that you might share in the glory of our Lord Jesus Christ” or “in order that you might receive glory like our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TH 2 14 pke7 figs-abstractnouns εἰς περιποίησιν δόξης τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you can express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “so that you might become glorious like our Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TH 2 15 holv grammar-connect-logic-result ἄρα οὖν 1 The words **So then** connect this verse with verses 13 and 14 as their logical conclusion. Because God did the wonderful things in those verses, the Thessalonians should do what verse 15 says. Use a natural way to introduce a conclusion in your language. Alternate translation: “Therefore” or “Because God did all of that for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2TH 2 15 pa9j figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **brothers** means fellow believers in Jesus, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2TH 2 15 u9ss figs-metaphor στήκετε 1 So then, brothers, stand firm Here, the phrase **stand firm** is used to mean to not change ones beliefs but, rather, to remain steadfast in what one believes. If this would be unclear in your language, consider using an equivalent expression, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “continue to believe the truth” or “do not give up your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TH 2 15 l4vr figs-metaphor κρατεῖτε τὰς παραδόσεις 1 hold tight to the traditions Here, **traditions** refers to the truths about Christ that Paul and the other apostles taught. Paul speaks of them as if his readers could hold on to them with their hands. Alternate translation: “do not give up believing those truths” or “continue to believe the true teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TH 2 15 cpdo figs-doublet στήκετε καὶ κρατεῖτε 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize the importance of doing this. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “keep on firmly believing” or “do not allow anyone to change your mind in any way about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2TH 2 15 whp8 figs-activepassive ἐδιδάχθητε 1 you were taught If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “we have taught you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TH 2 15 z2vs figs-synecdoche διὰ λόγου 1 whether by word or by our letter Here, **by word** is an expression that means that Paul had been present with them and taught them personally. Alternate translation: “by what we said to you in person” or “when we were talking to you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2TH 2 15 jrg4 figs-explicit δι’ ἐπιστολῆς ἡμῶν 1 whether by word or by our letter You can make clear the implicit information that **by our letter** refers to what Paul taught to the Thessalonians in an earlier letter (probably 1 Thessalonians). Alternate translation: “by what we wrote to you in a letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TH 2 16 g8m1 grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Now The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2TH 2 16 njk1 translate-blessing αὐτὸς δὲ ὁ Κύριος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς ὁ Πατὴρ ἡμῶν 1 Connecting Statement: Paul ends this section with a blessing. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “Now may our Lord Jesus Christ himself, and God our Father” or “We pray that our Lord Jesus Christ himself, and God our Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
2TH 2 16 yge9 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν & ἡμᾶς 1 our Lord … who loved us and gave us The words **our** and **us** refer to all believers including the writers. If you have exclusive and inclusive first-person plural pronouns in your language, these should be inclusive pronouns. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2TH 2 16 cm54 figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς & Κύριος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς 1 our Lord Jesus Christ himself Here, **himself** gives additional emphasis to the phrase **Lord Jesus Christ**. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “our Lord Jesus Christ, the very one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2TH 2 16 h3gk figs-abstractnouns δοὺς παράκλησιν αἰωνίαν, καὶ ἐλπίδα ἀγαθὴν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **comfort** and **hope**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “always comforts us and has given us good things to hope for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TH 2 16 iirq figs-abstractnouns ἐν χάριτι 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because of how gracious he is to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TH 2 17 x3rr figs-metonymy παρακαλέσαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας, καὶ στηρίξαι 1 may he comfort and strengthen your hearts Here, the word **hearts** represents both the emotion and will of a person. If **hearts** does not mean this in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “may he give comfort and strength to your livers” or “may he comfort you and strengthen you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TH 2 17 yw5f figs-synecdoche ἐν παντὶ ἔργῳ καὶ λόγῳ ἀγαθῷ 1 every good work and word If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the phrase **work and word** with verbs. Alternative translation: “in every good thing that you do and say” or “so that you could do and say everything that is good.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2TH 3 intro b8hk 0 # 2 Thessalonians 3 General Notes<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Idle and lazy persons<br><br>In Thessalonica, there apparently was a problem with people in the church who were able to work but refused to do so. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])<br><br>### What should you do if your brother sins?<br><br>In this chapter, Paul teaches that Christians need to live in a way that honors God. Christians should also encourage one another and hold each other accountable for what they do. The church is also responsible for encouraging believers to repent if they sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
2TH 3 1 k33i checking/headings 0 General Information: In verses 15, Paul asks the believers to pray for him and his companions and encourages them. A heading for this section might be, “Pray for Us.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]])
2TH 3 1 jy75 grammar-connect-words-phrases τὸ λοιπὸν 1 Finally Here, the word **Finally** marks a change in topic. To **pray** is not the final instruction that Paul gives but it is how Paul opens the last section of his letter where he will discuss a few remaining matters. Alternate translation: “One more thing” or “So, continuing on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2TH 3 1 m1s5 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2TH 3 1 v8k2 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 The pronoun **us** refers to Paul and his companions. If you have exclusive and inclusive first person pronouns in your language, this should be an exclusive pronoun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2TH 3 1 r54v figs-metaphor τρέχῃ 1 so that the word of the Lord might run and might be glorified, just as also with you Paul speaks of Gods **word** spreading as if it were running from place to place. He is comparing the rapid spread of Gods word to a person who takes good news to others. Alternate translation: “might spread rapidly” or “might be heard by many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TH 3 1 yvkm figs-activepassive καὶ δοξάζηται 1 so that the word of the Lord might run and might be glorified, just as also with you You can state this in active form, if the passive construction is not natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and that many people would honor it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TH 3 1 egho figs-ellipsis καθὼς καὶ πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “just as also happened with you” or “which is exactly what you did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2TH 3 2 xg2h figs-activepassive ῥυσθῶμεν 1 we might be rescued You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God may save us” or “God may rescue us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TH 3 2 h11p figs-doublet ἀτόπων καὶ πονηρῶν 1 The two terms **perverse** and **evil** mean basically the same thing and are used together to emphasize the amount of evil. If your language does not use repetition to do this or if you do not have two words for these attributes, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “very wicked men” or “many wicked men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2TH 3 2 p1ct figs-litotes οὐ γὰρ πάντων ἡ πίστις 1 for not everyone has faith The phrase **not everyone** is a negative understatement that emphasizes how rare faith is. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “for only some people believe in the Lord” or “for people who believe in Jesus are few” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2TH 3 2 appf figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “believes in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TH 3 3 yx9g figs-explicit ὃς στηρίξει 1 who will strengthen The word **strengthen** here refers to spiritual strength, not physical strength. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “who will strengthen you spiritually” or “who will make you inwardly strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TH 3 3 p91k τοῦ πονηροῦ 1 the evil one This could mean: (1) the evil being Satan. Alternate translation: “Satan” or (2) evil in general. Alternate translation: “evil”
2TH 3 4 xk85 figs-nominaladj πεποίθαμεν δὲ 1 we are confident The phrase **We are also confident** may be confusing in some languages. If that is the case in your language, you could translate this as a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “We also have faith” or “We also trust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2TH 3 4 w79e figs-metaphor πεποίθαμεν δὲ ἐν Κυρίῳ ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς 1 This could mean: (1) Paul has confidence in the Thessalonian believers because of the close relationship that they have with the Lord Jesus. In this case, Paul is speaking of this relationship as if they were inside the Lord Jesus. Alternative translation: “Because you are united to the Lord, we are also confident” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) (2) Paul has confidence in the Lord Jesus, that he will cause them to do what is right. Alternative translation: “Because we trust in the Lord Jesus to enable you, we are also confident”
2TH 3 5 giz4 figs-metonymy ὁ & Κύριος κατευθύναι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 may the Lord direct your hearts Here, **hearts** stands for a persons thoughts or mind. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “may the Lord cause you to understand the love of God and the endurance of Christ” or “may the Lord help you to know the love of God and the endurance of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TH 3 5 wre3 figs-metaphor εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 to the love of God and to the endurance of Christ Paul speaks of Gods **love** and Christs **endurance** as if they were destinations on a path. If your readers would not understand this figure of speech, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “to know how much God loves you and the endurance that Christ supplies you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TH 3 5 dzbn figs-possession εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **love of God** can mean (1) the love that comes from God. Alternate translation: “to know how much God loves you” or (2) the love that people give to God. Alternate translation: “to love God more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2TH 3 5 ia7x figs-possession εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **endurance of Christ** can mean (1) the endurance that Christ gives to his people. Alternate translation: “to experience the endurance that Christ gives you” or (2) the endurance that Christ had through his suffering. Alternate translation: “to know how much Christ has endured for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2TH 3 6 mst3 checking/headings 0 General Information: In verses 615, Paul gives the believers some final instructions about working and not being idle. A heading for this section might be, “Believers Must Work.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]])
2TH 3 6 v33v grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Now The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2TH 3 6 x9l8 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί & ἀδελφοῦ 1 brothers Here, the words **brothers** and **brother** refer to fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … brother or sister” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2TH 3 6 y4a9 figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in the name of our Lord Jesus Christ Here, **name** stands for the person of Jesus Christ. It can also mean “with the authority of.” If using this term is not clear in your language, you could express it directly. Alternate translation: “as if our Lord Jesus Christ himself were speaking” or “with the authority that our Lord Jesus Christ has given us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TH 3 6 jvw1 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 of our Lord Here, **our** refers to all believers. If you have exclusive and inclusive first-person plural pronouns in your language, this should be an inclusive pronoun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2TH 3 6 x2r8 figs-metaphor ἀτάκτως περιπατοῦντος 1 Here Paul speaks of people who are not living well as if they walk in a haphazard manner. If your readers would not understand this metaphor, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “who is living in a bad way” or “who is not living correctly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TH 3 6 se1g τὴν παράδοσιν 1 Here, **the traditions** refers to the teachings that the apostles received from Jesus and are passing along to all believers. Alternate translation: “the teachings” or “the instructions”
2TH 3 7 h222 figs-explicit μιμεῖσθαι ἡμᾶς 1 to imitate us The phrase **to imitate** may be a difficult word to translate in your language. In that case, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “to act the way that my fellow workers and I act” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TH 3 7 b1i1 figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἠτακτήσαμεν ἐν ὑμῖν 1 we did not behave disorderly among you Paul uses a double negative to emphasize the positive. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “we lived among you as those who had much discipline” or “we worked diligently when we were with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2TH 3 8 ruh3 translate-unknown ἄρτον 1 Paul refers to **bread** here because it was the most common and basic food for them. If your readers would not be familiar with **bread** or if that is a kind of food that would be considered unusual or extravagant, you could use a general expression for ordinary food. Alternate translation: “food” or “anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2TH 3 8 d9h1 figs-merism νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας ἐργαζόμενοι 1 working night and day Here, **night and day** forms a merism, which means “all the time.” If it would be helpful in your language to explain that they did not work without taking any rest whatsoever, then you could make the meaning clear. Alternate translation: “working throughout that time with little rest” or “we worked almost continuously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
2TH 3 8 w8fq figs-doublet ἐν κόπῳ καὶ μόχθῳ 1 in toil and hardship Here, **toil** and **hardship** have very similar meanings. Paul used this repetition to emphasize that they worked very hard. If you do not have two similar words that you can use here or if it would be unnatural for you to use such repetition, you could emphasize this in another way. Alternate translation: “with great effort” or “in very difficult circumstances” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2TH 3 9 sn3k figs-doublenegatives οὐχ ὅτι οὐκ ἔχομεν ἐξουσίαν, ἀλλ’ 1 not because we do not have authority, but Paul uses a double negative to emphasize the positive. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “and we certainly have the right to receive food from you, but instead we worked for our food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2TH 3 9 lrjr figs-abstractnouns ἑαυτοὺς τύπον δῶμεν ὑμῖν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **example**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “we might show you the right way in order for you” or “we might demonstrate the way to live for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TH 3 9 z0up μιμεῖσθαι 1 See how you translated **imitate** in verse 7.
2TH 3 10 c652 figs-doublenegatives εἴ τις οὐ θέλει ἐργάζεσθαι, μηδὲ ἐσθιέτω 1 If anyone is not willing to work, do not even let him eat You can state this in positive form, if this form is difficult to understand in your language. Alternate translation: “If a person wants to eat, he must work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2TH 3 11 ey6c figs-metaphor τινας περιπατοῦντας & ἀτάκτως 1 some who are walking idly Here, **walking** stands for behavior in life. you can use an equivalent metaphor from your culture, if it is available. Otherwise, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “some who are living idle lives” or “some who are being lazy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TH 3 11 iv1z translate-unknown ἀλλὰ περιεργαζομένους 1 but meddling Meddlers are people who interfere in the affairs of others without being asked to help. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2TH 3 12 bm6z figs-abstractnouns μετὰ ἡσυχίας 1 with quietness Here, **with quietness** is the opposite of meddling. Paul exhorts the meddlers to stop getting involved in other peoples affairs. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **quietness**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in a quiet and peaceful manner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TH 3 13 jx8t grammar-connect-logic-contrast δέ 1 But Paul here uses the word **But** to contrast the lazy believers with the hardworking believers. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Concerning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2TH 3 13 e59v figs-you ὑμεῖς 1 you The word **you** refers to all the Thessalonian believers, so it should be in plural form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
2TH 3 13 usu9 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2TH 3 14 mzs4 figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ ἡμῶν 1 if anyone does not obey our word Paul is referring to his command to the Thessalonian believers as a **word**. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “our instructions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TH 3 14 nv3v figs-idiom τοῦτον σημειοῦσθε 1 note this one Paul wants the Thessalonians to notice who this person is. Alternate translation: “point out that person” or “make sure everyone knows who he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2TH 3 14 y552 figs-explicit ἵνα ἐντραπῇ 1 so that he may be put to shame Paul instructs believers to avoid lazy believers as a disciplinary action. If necessary, you could make this explicit to make the meaning clear. Alternate translation: “in order that he will know that his laziness is wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TH 3 15 idj6 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφόν 1 Although the term **brother** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2TH 3 16 nef4 checking/headings 0 General Information: In verses 1618, Paul makes closing remarks to the believers at Thessalonica. A heading for this section might be, “Closing Remarks.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]])
2TH 3 16 z1zs grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2TH 3 16 whb9 translate-blessing αὐτὸς & ὁ Κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης, δῴη ὑμῖν 1 may the Lord of peace himself give you Paul ends the letter with blessings that are also prayers. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing or prayer in your language. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord of peace himself may give you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
2TH 3 16 zl1s figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς & ὁ Κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης 1 the Lord of peace himself Here, **himself** emphasizes that the Lord is the source of peace and that he will personally give peace to believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2TH 3 17 c2cb ὁ ἀσπασμὸς τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ, Παύλου, ὅ ἐστιν σημεῖον ἐν πάσῃ ἐπιστολῇ, οὕτως γράφω 1 This greeting is in my own hand—Paul—which is a sign in every letter. In this manner I write Alternate translation: “I, Paul, write this greeting with my own hand, which I do in every letter, as a sign that this letter is truly from me because this is how I write”
2TH 3 17 e3sa figs-idiom τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ 1 Here, the phrase **in my own hand** is an idiom meaning “in my own handwriting.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I myself am writing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2TH 3 17 wg3f figs-explicit οὕτως γράφω 1 In this manner I write Paul makes it clear that this letter is from him and is not a forgery. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you could know that the letter is from me because this is how I write” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TH 3 18 h18b translate-blessing ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, μετὰ πάντων ὑμῶν 1 Paul ends the letter with one more blessing. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “I pray that the grace of our Lord Jesus Christ will be with you all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
1 Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
2 2TH front intro krd6 0 # Introduction to 2 Thessalonians<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the book of 2 Thessalonians<br><br>1. Greetings and thanksgiving (1:1–2)<br>1. Believers suffer from persecution (1:3–12)<br> * God uses persecution to increase faith, love, and endurance in believers (1:3–4)<br> * God is just: (1:5–12)<br> * God will make believers worthy of his kingdom<br> * God will give relief to believers<br> * God will punish those who persecute believers<br>1. Some believers misunderstand about the second coming of Christ (2:1–12)<br> * Christ’s return has not yet happened (2:1–2)<br> * Instruction about the events that will precede the return of Christ (2:3–12)<br>1. Paul’s confidence that God will save the Thessalonian believers (2:13–17)<br> * Paul calls the Thessalonian believers to “stand firm” (2:13–15)<br> * Paul prays that God will comfort them (2:16–17)<br>1. Paul requests that the Thessalonian believers pray for him (3:1–5)<br>1. Paul give commands about idle believers (3:6–15)<br>1. Closing (3:16–17)<br><br>### Who wrote 2 Thessalonians?<br><br>Paul wrote 2 Thessalonians. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted believers. After he became a believer, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.<br><br>Paul is the author of this letter, but he includes Silvanus and Timothy as senders of the letter. Paul wrote this letter while he, Silvanus, and Timothy were staying in the city of Corinth.<br><br>### What is the book of 2 Thessalonians about?<br><br>Paul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He encouraged the believers because they were being persecuted. He told them to continue living in a way that pleased God. He also wanted to teach them again about Christ’s return. He also warned them that they should not be idle but should work as they wait for Christ to return.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Thessalonians” or “Second Thessalonians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The Second Letter to the Christians/believers in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?<br><br>Paul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation. And he will cause there to be peace everywhere. Paul also explained that a “man of lawlessness” will come before Christ’s return. This person will obey Satan and cause many people to oppose God. But Jesus will destroy this person when he returns.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?<br><br>Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.<br><br>### How are pronouns used in this letter?<br><br>In this letter, the words “we” and “us” refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. If your language differentiates between inclusive and exclusive pronouns, use an exclusive pronoun for these. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])<br><br>In this letter, the words “you” and “your” are plural and refer to the Thessalonian believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the book of 2 Thessalonians?<br><br>For the following verses, some ancient manuscripts have a different reading than others. The ULT follows the reading that scholars consider to be the most accurate and puts the other reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in your area that your people are familiar with, consider using the reading that it follows. If not, translators are advised to follow the reading in the ULT.<br>* “and the man of lawlessness is revealed” (2:3). The ULT, UST, and most modern versions read this way. Other versions follow the reading, “and the man of sin is revealed.”<br>* “For God chose you as the firstfruits for salvation” (2:13) The ULT, UST, and some other versions read this way. The other reading is, “For God chose you from the first/beginning for salvation.”<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
3 2TH 1 intro m987 0 # 2 Thessalonians 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>Verses 1–2 formally introduce this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type in which the sender identified himself, then the recipient, then gave a greeting.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible.<br><br>A paradox occurs in verses 4–5 where Paul talks about the Thessalonian believers’ faithfulness through persecution as “evidence of the righteous judgment of God.” People would not normally think that believing in God while being persecuted is a sign of God’s righteous judgment. But the fact that God gave them the ability to persevere in their faith is evidence that God claims them as his own and will judge them as worthy of his kingdom. In verses 5–10, Paul goes on to explain more of God’s righteous judgment, that God will reward those who believe in him and that he will punish those who afflict his people. ([2 Thessalonians 1:4–5](./04.md))<br><br>Another paradox occurs in verse 9 where Paul describes the penalty for rejecting God as “eternal destruction.” Normally when something is destroyed it ceases to exist. But in this case, the people who reject God will experience eternal separation from God, as the verse goes on to explain. Being separated from God destroys all that was enjoyable about their lives, and this continuous destruction is what they experience through eternity. ([2 Thessalonians 1:9](../01/09.md))
4 2TH 1 1 hm3e translate-names Σιλουανὸς 1 Silvanus **Silvanus** is the Latin form of “Silas.” **Silvanus** is the name of a man, the same person listed in the book of Acts as Paul’s fellow traveler. If your readers may not know that these two are the same person, you could use the name “Silas” in the text and “Silvanus” in the footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
5 2TH 1 1 ge00 figs-ellipsis Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος; τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 You may want to fill in the words necessary to make this a complete sentence. Alternate translation: “Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy send this letter to the church” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis)
6 2TH 1 1 l8q8 figs-explicit Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος 1 Although **Paul** wrote this letter, he identifies **Silvanus and Timothy** as also sending it. This means that they were with him and were in agreement with it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make that clear, as in the UST. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit)
7 2TH 1 1 eajo figs-metaphor ἐν Θεῷ Πατρὶ ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ 1 Here Paul speaks of the believers as though they were occupying space inside of God and Jesus. This metaphor expresses the idea that believers are spiritually united to God and Jesus. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “united to God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” or “sharing life with God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
8 2TH 1 2 g6rb translate-blessing χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Grace to you Many languages have different ways to offer good wishes as they greet. Paul greeted his letter recipients with a blessing. Use a form that would be a good wish or blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “We pray that God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ give you grace and peace” or “I wish you grace and peace from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” or “May the grace and peace of God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ be your portion” or “May God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ show grace and give peace to your hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
9 2TH 1 2 bv9m figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **Grace** and **peace**, you can express these ideas as verbs or in another way. Alternate translation: “May God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ be gracious to you and give rest to your inner being” or “...be favorable to you and make you at ease” or “...be kind to you and set your heart at rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
10 2TH 1 3 o6v9 checking/headings 0 General Information: In verses 3–12, Paul gives thanks for the believers in Thessalonica and prays for them. A heading for this section might be, “Thanks and Prayers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]])
11 2TH 1 3 m6z5 εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν & πάντοτε 1 General Information: Paul here uses the word **ought** to express that he has a moral obligation to God to **give thanks** for the believers in Thessalonica. Use a natural expression for this in your language. Alternate translation: “We are bound always to thank” or “We can do no other than to thank” or “We must give thanks continually to”
12 2TH 1 3 ea59 figs-hyperbole εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε 1 We ought always to give thanks to God Paul uses **always** as a generalization meaning “often” or “regularly.” Alternate translation: “We should often give thanks to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
13 2TH 1 3 o01t figs-explicit εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε περὶ ὑμῶν, ἀδελφοί 1 If your readers might think that Paul is expressing an obligation only and that he does not actually pray for the Thessalonians, you could express the reality explicitly. Alternate translation: “We always thank God for you, brothers, as we ought” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
14 2TH 1 3 h6t9 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. If your readers understand that it is addressed only to men, you may need to use both the masculine and the feminine forms of that word in your language. If you use a nonfigurative word such as “believers”, see that both the genders are addressed. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
15 2TH 1 3 ezaf writing-pronouns καθὼς ἄξιόν ἐστιν 1 If it is difficult to express **just as it is fitting** in your language or if it is unclear what **it** refers to, consider starting a new sentence here to state it clearly. Alternate translation: “When we give thanks for you we are doing the right thing” or “Giving thanks for you is right for us to be doing” or “ & is the right thing to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
16 2TH 1 3 emu9 figs-abstractnouns ὑπεραυξάνει ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you can express this idea as a verb. Alternate translation: “you believe in Christ more and more” or “you increasingly trust in Christ” or “you rely on Christ more each day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
17 2TH 1 3 xy7k figs-abstractnouns πλεονάζει ἡ ἀγάπη ἑνὸς ἑκάστου, πάντων ὑμῶν, εἰς ἀλλήλους 1 the love of each one of you all for one another is increasing If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you can express this idea as a verb. Alternate translation: “each of you sincerely loves one another more and more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
18 2TH 1 3 bmn6 figs-rpronouns ἀλλήλους 1 one another Here, **one another** means fellow believers. Alternate translation: “each other” or “each believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
19 2TH 1 4 kx1n figs-rpronouns αὐτοὺς ἡμᾶς 1 we ourselves Here, **ourselves** is added to **we** to emphasize that even the apostle Paul and his associates are boasting about the Thessalonian believers. Alternate translation: “even we” or “we are the ones who” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns)
20 2TH 1 4 gcth figs-abstractnouns τῆς ὑπομονῆς ὑμῶν, καὶ πίστεως 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **endurance** and **faith** or if it is unclear how these two terms relate, you can express these same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how you patiently continue to trust in Jesus” or “how you persevere in believing in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
21 2TH 1 4 qlo9 figs-doublet ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς διωγμοῖς ὑμῶν, καὶ ταῖς θλίψεσιν 1 The two words **persecutions** and **afflictions** are saying very similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize how difficult life has been for the Thessalonian believers. If two words are difficult to find in your language or if your language does not use repetition in this way, you can use one word with this meaning and make the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “as you have been going through all these very difficult times” or “as people make you suffer in all the ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
22 2TH 1 4 md0d figs-explicit πίστεως ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς διωγμοῖς ὑμῶν 1 Here, **faith in all your persecutions** does not mean to believe in or trust in persecutions. If your readers might be confused by that, you could express it more clearly. Alternate translation: “faith in Jesus Christ during all the times you are persecuted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
23 2TH 1 5 rs3b figs-explicit ἔνδειγμα τῆς δικαίας κρίσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰς τὸ καταξιωθῆναι ὑμᾶς 1 The **evidence** that Paul is referring to here is the faithful endurance of the Thessalonian believers while suffering persecution, which he mentioned in verse 4. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. It may also be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Your endurance while suffering is a clear indication of God’s righteous judgment, that he considers you worthy” or “Your faithfulness through persecution shows that God is just and right to consider you worthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
24 2TH 1 5 dad9 figs-activepassive εἰς τὸ καταξιωθῆναι ὑμᾶς τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 for you to be considered worthy of the kingdom of God You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that God will consider you worthy to be part of his kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
25 2TH 1 5 xm2g figs-explicit ὑπὲρ ἧς καὶ πάσχετε 1 Here, **also** could mean: (1) the Thessalonian believers are suffering for the kingdom of God as well as being counted worthy of it. Alternate translation: “being a part of which is also the reason that you are suffering” (2) the Thessalonian believers are suffering along with other believers. Alternate translation: “which is why you are going through sufferings along with many others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
26 2TH 1 6 cxx1 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴπερ δίκαιον παρὰ Θεῷ 1 if indeed it is righteous for God Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you know that God is just” or “for God is certainly right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
27 2TH 1 6 id3i figs-metaphor παρὰ Θεῷ, ἀνταποδοῦναι τοῖς θλίβουσιν ὑμᾶς θλῖψιν 1 for God to return affliction to those who are afflicting you Here, **to return** means to cause someone to experience the same thing that they did to someone else as though the same action were bouncing back onto the people who did that action. Use a natural expression for this kind of reciprocal action. Alternate translation: “for God to afflict those who are afflicting you” or “for God to pay back those who are afflicting you” “for God to do the same to those who are afflicting you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
28 2TH 1 6 zemk figs-abstractnouns ἀνταποδοῦναι τοῖς θλίβουσιν ὑμᾶς θλῖψιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **affliction**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to afflict those who are afflicting you” or “to trouble those who are troubling you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
29 2TH 1 7 hxy2 figs-ellipsis καὶ ὑμῖν & ἄνεσιν 1 and relief to you The words **and relief to you** continue the description of what God is right “to return” to people (verse 6). If this would not be understood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and it is righteous for God to give relief to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
30 2TH 1 7 l3ht writing-pronouns καὶ ὑμῖν τοῖς θλιβομένοις, ἄνεσιν μεθ’ ἡμῶν 1 Here, **you who are being afflicted** refers to the Thessalonian believers, and **us** refers to Paul and his associates. Other people are afflicting both groups because of their faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “and relief to you who are being afflicted just as we are being afflicted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
31 2TH 1 7 knbb figs-abstractnouns ὑμῖν & ἄνεσιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **relief**, you can express this idea with a verb or in another way. Alternate translation: “to relieve you” or “to rescue you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
32 2TH 1 7 bcxy figs-activepassive τοῖς θλιβομένοις 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom other people are afflicting” or “from the affliction that others are causing you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
33 2TH 1 7 fh5g figs-explicit ἐν τῇ ἀποκαλύψει τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, **at the revealing** is an indication of the time when the suffering believers will have relief from their suffering. Alternate translation: “at the time when the Lord Jesus is revealed” or “when everyone sees the Lord Jesus coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
34 2TH 1 8 p1ie figs-abstractnouns διδόντος ἐκδίκησιν τοῖς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **vengeance**, you can express this idea in another way. Since this is part of God’s justice, do not use a word that implies that God is doing something illegal or inappropriate. Alternate translation: “punishing the people” or “judging the ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
35 2TH 1 8 ynt4 figs-explicit τοῖς μὴ εἰδόσι Θεὸν 1 Here, **the ones not having known God** refers to those who have refused the relationship with God that he had offered to them. Alternate translation: “on those who did not want to know God” or “on those who have rejected God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
36 2TH 1 8 gv0v figs-explicit καὶ τοῖς μὴ ὑπακούουσιν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1 The phrase, **not obeying the gospel** could refer to: (1) the same people as **those not having known God**. Alternate translation: “and who are not obeying the gospel” (2) a separate group. Alternate translation: “and also on those who are not obeying the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
37 2TH 1 8 m37v figs-idiom ὑπακούουσιν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1 The phrase, **obeying the gospel** is an idiom that means to live according to everything that God tells us in the gospel message. Alternate translation: “living according to the message of the gospel” or “heeding the admonitions that are part of the gospel message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
38 2TH 1 8 dkkx figs-possession τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the general possessive form **of our Lord Jesus** to describe **the gospel**. The specific meaning here is that the gospel is about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the gospel that is about our Lord Jesus” or “the gospel message that tells us about our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
39 2TH 1 9 plw5 writing-pronouns οἵτινες δίκην τίσουσιν 1 who will pay the penalty—eternal destruction Here, **who** refers to the people who are not obeying the gospel, not to the Lord Jesus. You may prefer to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Those people will pay the penalty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
40 2TH 1 9 peog figs-abstractnouns οἵτινες δίκην τίσουσιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of the word **penalty**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who will be punished by God” or “whom God will punish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
41 2TH 1 9 ebf1 figs-idiom δίκην τίσουσιν 1 Here, the phrase **pay the penalty** is an idiom meaning to suffer the consequences of doing something bad. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “will suffer the consequences” or “will undergo the retribution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
42 2TH 1 9 yruv figs-abstractnouns ὄλεθρον αἰώνιον 1 Here, **eternal destruction** further describes the **penalty** that people will experience if they refuse to “obey the gospel.” The **destruction** that these people will experience is **eternal**, that is, it never ends. Therefore, do not translate with the meaning that these people will cease to exist. They will continue to exist, but continually experience the ruin of their lives. If necessary, put this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “God will punish them eternally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
43 2TH 1 9 qhta figs-idiom ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Here, **the face of the Lord** is an idiom meaning the presence of the Lord. Alternate translation: “away from our Lord Jesus” or “separated from the presence of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
44 2TH 1 9 htqg figs-possession τῆς δόξης τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ 1 Here, the possessive form is describing **power** that has **glory**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “glorious” to describe the **power**. Alternate translation: “his glorious power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
45 2TH 1 9 wmdm figs-abstractnouns τῆς δόξης τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **glory** and **power**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “experiencing how magnificent and powerful he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
46 2TH 1 10 ugk9 figs-explicit ὅταν ἔλθῃ & ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ 1 when he comes on that day Here, **that day** is the day when Jesus will return to the world. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the day when Jesus returns to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
47 2TH 1 10 bi2u figs-activepassive ἐνδοξασθῆναι ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις αὐτοῦ, καὶ θαυμασθῆναι ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς πιστεύσασιν 1 to be glorified by his saints and to be marveled at by all those who have believed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as his saints glorify him and all those who have believed marvel at him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
48 2TH 1 10 wsvb grammar-connect-logic-result ἐνδοξασθῆναι ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις αὐτοῦ, καὶ θαυμασθῆναι 1 Here, the two verbs **to be glorified**and **to be marveled at** indicate the result of Jesus’ coming, not the purpose. Use a connector here that indicates result. Alternate translation: “as his saints glorify him and all those who have believed marvel at him” or “with the result that his saints will glorify him and all those who have believed will marvel at him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
49 2TH 1 10 z1hg ἐνδοξασθῆναι ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις αὐτοῦ, καὶ θαυμασθῆναι ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς πιστεύσασιν 1 The **saints** and **the ones having believed** are one group of people, not two. If your readers might be confused by this, you could combine these into one phrase. Alternate translation: “with the result that all of his saints, that is, the believers, will glorify him and marvel at him” or “as all of his people glorify him and marvel at him”
50 2TH 1 10 e56p figs-activepassive ἐπιστεύθη τὸ μαρτύριον ἡμῶν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you have believed our witness when we shared it with you” or “when we testified about the saving power of Jesus Christ, you believed what we said” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive)
51 2TH 1 11 zy14 grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς ὃ 1 Here, **For this** connects verse 11 to verse 10, so that verse 11 gives the means or method (prayer for the Thessalonian believers) for reaching the purpose that verse 10 has just described (for Jesus to “be glorified & and marveled at”). Use a natural way in your language for introducing this relationship. Alternate translation: “This is why” or “To this end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
52 2TH 1 11 ik19 figs-hyperbole καὶ προσευχόμεθα πάντοτε περὶ ὑμῶν 1 we also pray always for you Paul is using **always** as an exaggeration in order to emphasize how often he prays for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “we also pray regularly for you” or “we continue to pray for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
53 2TH 1 11 hiv9 figs-explicit τῆς κλήσεως 1 of your calling Here, **calling** refers to God appointing or choosing people to belong to him and to proclaim his message of salvation through Jesus. Alternate translation: “to appoint you to belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
54 2TH 1 11 r8gk figs-abstractnouns πληρώσῃ πᾶσαν εὐδοκίαν ἀγαθωσύνης, καὶ ἔργον πίστεως ἐν δυνάμει 1 he may fulfill every desire of goodness If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **desire**, **goodness**, **faith**, and **power**, you can express these ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “he may make you able to do all of the good things that you want to do because you trust in Jesus and because God is powerful” or “he may empower you to act on what you believe in order to do good things in every way that you desire, because God is powerful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
55 2TH 1 11 c7o6 figs-ellipsis καὶ πληρώσῃ 1 Here, **and he may fulfill** adds another reason why Paul and his associates **pray always** for the Thessalonian believers. This part of the sentence assumes some of the words from earlier in the sentence. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the earlier part of the sentence. Alternate translation: “and we also pray so that he may fulfill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
56 2TH 1 12 nvth grammar-connect-logic-goal ὅπως 1 Here, **so that** introduces the purpose for which Paul and his associates pray all of the things mentioned in verse 11. It is a repetition of the same purpose that was given in verse 10, using similar words. Alternate translation: “and we also pray so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
57 2TH 1 12 c6ec figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, **the name of our Lord Jesus** stands for the person of the Lord Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the reputation of our Lord Jesus” or “our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
58 2TH 1 12 q994 figs-activepassive ὅπως ἐνδοξασθῇ τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ, ἐν ὑμῖν 1 so that the name of our Lord Jesus might be glorified in you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. This could mean: (1) the Thessalonian believers will glorify Jesus. Alternate translation: “so that you would glorify the name of our Lord Jesus” (2) others will glorify Jesus because of what he has done for the Thessalonian believers. Alternate translation: “so that people would glorify the name of our Lord Jesus because of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
59 2TH 1 12 pg2i figs-activepassive καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν αὐτῷ 1 and you in him If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and Jesus might glorify you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
60 2TH 1 12 l4l1 figs-ellipsis καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν αὐτῷ 1 The phrase **and you in him** leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could make a complete sentence by supplying these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and so that you might be glorified in him” or “and so that he might glorify you” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis)
61 2TH 1 12 z8k9 figs-abstractnouns κατὰ τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν 1 according to the grace of our God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to how exceedingly kind our God and the Lord Jesus Christ are to you” or “as our God and the Lord Jesus Christ continue to abundantly bless you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
62 2TH 1 12 z1my τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 The phrase translated as **our God and the Lord Jesus Christ** could refer to: (1) two persons of the Trinity, God the Father and Jesus the Son. (2) one person, Jesus, who is both God and Lord. Alternate translation: “of our God and Lord, Jesus Christ”
63 2TH 2 intro jq9r 0 # 2 Thessalonians 2 General Notes<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Man of lawlessness<br><br>This person is also called “the son of destruction” and “the lawless one” in this chapter. He is not Satan, but he is empowered by Satan and is the leader of those who do Satan’s evil work in the world in the last days. He is certainly one of the “antichrists” mentioned by John (1 John 2:18) and may be the final one, described as a beast in Revelation 13. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]])<br><br>### Sits in the temple of God<br><br>Paul could be referring to the Jerusalem temple that the Romans destroyed several years after he wrote this letter. Or he could be referring to a future physical temple, or to the church as the spiritual temple of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
64 2TH 2 1 r36t checking/headings 0 General Information: In verses 1–12, Paul exhorts believers not to be deceived about the day Jesus will come back and warns them about the coming man of lawlessness. A heading for this section might be, “The Man of Lawlessness” or “The Deception before Jesus Returns.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]])
65 2TH 2 1 q1uq grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Now The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
66 2TH 2 1 uy4z grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ὑπὲρ τῆς παρουσίας τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἡμῶν ἐπισυναγωγῆς ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 The **coming of our Lord Jesus Christ** and **our gathering to him** are two actions that happen at the same time. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “regarding the time of our Lord Jesus coming when we will be gathered together unto him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
67 2TH 2 1 sx2f figs-activepassive ὑπὲρ τῆς παρουσίας τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἡμῶν ἐπισυναγωγῆς ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 If it is more natural in your language, you could use active verbs for the events of **coming** and **gathering**. Alternate translation: “about the time when our Lord Jesus will come and gather us to himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
68 2TH 2 1 cvg5 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
69 2TH 2 2 b8b2 figs-doublenegatives εἰς τὸ μὴ ταχέως σαλευθῆναι ὑμᾶς ἀπὸ τοῦ νοὸς 1 for you not to be quickly shaken in your mind nor to be troubled The phrase **shaken in your mind** refers to a person’s thoughts being unsettled. You could also express this positively. Alternate translation: “for you to remain firm in your thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
70 2TH 2 2 fj52 figs-doublenegatives μηδὲ θροεῖσθαι 1 The phrase **to be troubled** refers to a person’s emotions being unsettled. You could also express this positively. Alternate translation: “and remain peaceful when a message comes” or “and keep calm when you hear something” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
71 2TH 2 2 d334 figs-ellipsis μήτε διὰ πνεύματος, μήτε διὰ λόγου, μήτε δι’ ἐπιστολῆς, ὡς δι’ ἡμῶν 1 by a spirit, nor by a word, nor by a letter as if from us Paul is leaving out some words here that might be necessary in your language. If it is helpful, you could supply these words. Alternate translation: “when you receive a message either by means of a spirit or by means of a spoken word or by means of a written letter that pretends to be coming from us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
72 2TH 2 2 ll80 figs-ellipsis ὡς δι’ ἡμῶν 1 Paul is leaving out some words here that might be necessary in your language. If it is helpful, you could supply these words. Alternate translation: “that claims to have come from us” or “trying to deceive you that it is from us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
73 2TH 2 2 k4dk figs-ellipsis ὡς ὅτι 1 as if that Paul is leaving out some words here that might be necessary in your language. If it is helpful, you could supply these words. Alternate translation: “that talks as if” or “that falsely claims that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
74 2TH 2 2 ib6m ἡ ἡμέρα τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the day of the Lord Here, **the day of the Lord** refers to the time when Jesus will come back to the earth for all believers.
75 2TH 2 3 l9c5 μή τις ὑμᾶς ἐξαπατήσῃ κατὰ μηδένα τρόπον 1 General Information: Alternate translation: “Do not permit anyone to fool you” or “Do not believe at all the wrong words that people are telling you about this”
76 2TH 2 3 ej66 figs-ellipsis ὅτι ἐὰν μὴ ἔλθῃ ἡ ἀποστασία πρῶτον 1 it may not come Here, Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “for the day of the Lord will not come unless the apostacy comes first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
77 2TH 2 3 y7ch figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἀποστασία 1 the apostacy Here, **the apostacy** refers to a future time when many people will turn away from God. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express it in another way. Alternate translation: “the time when many people will rebel against God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
78 2TH 2 3 e86v figs-activepassive ἀποκαλυφθῇ ὁ ἄνθρωπος τῆς ἀνομίας 1 the man of lawlessness may be revealed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the man of lawlessness arrives” or “the man of lawlessness makes himself known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
79 2TH 2 3 jsyj figs-possession ὁ ἄνθρωπος τῆς ἀνομίας 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **man** who is characterized by **lawlessness**. By this Paul means that this man will oppose all of God’s commandments and instructions. If this is not clear in your language, you could express this another way. Alternate translation: “the lawless man” or “the man who opposes God’s rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
80 2TH 2 3 tkg9 figs-idiom ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας 1 the son of destruction Here, **son of destruction** is an idiom meaning a person who is destined for destruction. Alternate translation: “the one who will be destroyed” or “the one whom God will destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
81 2TH 2 3 x6p0 figs-events ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας 1 God will destroy this person some time after the events of verse 4. If it would be clearer in your language, consider moving this phrase to the end of verse 4. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
82 2TH 2 4 t485 figs-activepassive πάντα λεγόμενον θεὸν ἢ σέβασμα 1 everything being called god or an object of worship You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “everything that people call God or whatever they worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
83 2TH 2 4 sk8t figs-pastforfuture αὐτὸν & καθίσαι 1 Here, **he himself sits** is part of a description of the kinds of things that this person does. If it is confusing in your language to use the present tense for this, you could use the future tense, since this will happen in the future. Alternate translation: “he himself will sit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
84 2TH 2 4 wj33 ἀποδεικνύντα ἑαυτὸν ὅτι ἔστιν Θεός 1 showing that he himself is God Here, **showing that he himself is God** does not mean that this man is God, but only that he is displaying himself to the world as though he were God. Alternate translation: “showing himself as God” or “attempting to demonstrate to people that he himself is God”
85 2TH 2 5 rsz1 figs-rquestion οὐ μνημονεύετε ὅτι, ἔτι ὢν πρὸς ὑμᾶς, ταῦτα ἔλεγον ὑμῖν 1 Do you not remember … these things? Paul is not asking for information here, but is using the question form to remind the Thessalonians of what he taught when he was with them previously. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
86 2TH 2 5 lkk7 writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 these things Here, **these things** refers to the topics that Paul mentioned in verses 3 and 4, including the rebellion against God, the man of lawlessness, and the return of Jesus on the day of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
87 2TH 2 6 hph0 καὶ νῦν τὸ κατέχον οἴδατε 1 There are two possibilities for understanding the function of the word **now** here. (1) It goes with **the one restraining {him}**. Alternate translation: “And you know what is restraining him now” or (2) it goes with **you know**. Alternate translation: “And now you know what is restraining him”
88 2TH 2 6 ask4 figs-activepassive τὸ ἀποκαλυφθῆναι αὐτὸν ἐν τῷ αὐτοῦ καιρῷ 1 he is revealed in his time If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the proper time, when God will allow him to reveal himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
89 2TH 2 7 faa5 grammar-connect-logic-contrast γὰρ 1 Here, the word translated **For** serves to connect this sentence as a contrast to what Paul has said about **lawlessness**, starting in verse 3. Until here, Paul was talking about lawlessness in the future, but now he wants to clarify that people are already being lawless.Use a natural way in your language for introducing this contrast. Alternate translation: “Now” or “Actually,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
90 2TH 2 7 si9i figs-abstractnouns τὸ & μυστήριον ἤδη ἐνεργεῖται τῆς ἀνομίας 1 mystery of lawlessness Here, **lawlessness** is characterized as a **mystery** because we cannot understand why people rebel against God’s wise instructions unless we understand the spiritual forces at work, which Paul explains here. If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you can express them in another way. Alternate translation: “people are already mysteriously rebelling against God” or “Satan is already secretly leading people to reject God’s laws, as this man will do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
91 2TH 2 7 fcu7 ὁ κατέχων 1 the one who restrains him To restrain someone is to hold him back or to keep him from doing what he wants to do. Alternate translation: “the one who has been holding him back”
92 2TH 2 7 bijc writing-pronouns γένηται 1 Here, **he** refers to the one who is restraining the man of lawlessness. If this is not clear to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who restrains the man of lawlessness moves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
93 2TH 2 7 tt88 figs-metaphor ἐκ μέσου γένηται 1 Here Paul speaks of the person who is restraining the man of lawlessness as though he were standing in front of him and blocking his path. If this does not make sense in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor or you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “he stops restraining him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
94 2TH 2 8 hn67 figs-activepassive καὶ τότε ἀποκαλυφθήσεται ὁ ἄνομος 1 and then the lawless one will be revealed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and then God will allow the lawless one to show himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
95 2TH 2 8 vay9 figs-metonymy τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 with the breath of his mouth In this figure of speech, **breath** represents the power of God and **mouth** represents the spoken word of Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “by the power of his spoken word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
96 2TH 2 8 hy3y figs-parallelism ἀνελεῖ τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ, καὶ καταργήσει τῇ ἐπιφανείᾳ τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ 1 and will bring to nothing by the appearance of his coming These two phrases describe the same event. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize how much more powerful Jesus is than the man of lawlessness. If it is confusing for your readers to talk about killing someone and then bringing him to nothing, you could reverse the order of the phrases, as in the UST, or you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “will destroy by his glorious appearance and with the breath of his mouth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
97 2TH 2 9 sp9v figs-possession οὗ ἐστιν ἡ παρουσία, κατ’ ἐνέργειαν τοῦ Σατανᾶ 1 with all power, and signs, and false wonders Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **work** that **Satan** does. If this is not clear in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Satan will bring this man and will work through him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
98 2TH 2 9 rikg οὗ 1 with all power, and signs, and false wonders Here, **whom** refers back to the man of lawlessness. Alternate translation: “of the man of lawlessness”
99 2TH 2 9 bd5m figs-hyperbole ἐν πάσῃ δυνάμει, καὶ σημείοις, καὶ τέρασιν ψεύδους 1 with all power, and signs, and false wonders Here, **all** is hyperbole. It can apply to: (1) only **power**, with the meaning “much” or “great.” Alternate translation: “with great power to do signs and false wonders” or (2) **power**, **signs**, and **wonders**, with the meaning “many kinds of.” Alternate translation: “with many kinds of power, signs, and false wonders” or (3) a combination of the two. Alternate translation: “with much power to do all kinds of signs and false wonders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
100 2TH 2 9 kcaw figs-abstractnouns ἐν πάσῃ δυνάμει, καὶ σημείοις, καὶ τέρασιν ψεύδους 1 with all power, and signs, and false wonders If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **power**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “with very powerful signs and false wonders” or “who made him very powerful to do signs and false wonders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
101 2TH 2 9 fjfn figs-doublet καὶ σημείοις, καὶ τέρασιν ψεύδους 1 with all power, and signs, and false wonders The words **signs** and **wonders** often occur together and mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how amazing they are. If your language does not have two words for this or does not use repetition to do this, you can use one word and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “and amazing false miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
102 2TH 2 10 tf75 figs-hyperbole πάσῃ 1 in all deceit of unrighteousness Here, **all** is hyperbole and could mean: (1) “a high degree of” or (2) “many kinds of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
103 2TH 2 10 ippb figs-possession ἐν πάσῃ ἀπάτῃ ἀδικίας 1 in all deceit of unrighteousness Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **deceit** that results from **unrighteousness**. If the relationship of the words is not clear in your language, you could express it more explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he is so unrighteous, he will be very deceptive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
104 2TH 2 10 b55e figs-abstractnouns ἐν πάσῃ ἀπάτῃ ἀδικίας, τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις 1 in all deceit of unrighteousness If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **deceit** and **unrighteousness**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “because he is so unrighteous, he will completely deceive those who are perishing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
105 2TH 2 10 e8hi grammar-connect-logic-result ἀνθ’ ὧν 1 in all deceit of unrighteousness What follows this phrase is the reason that the people are perishing. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason. You may want to start a new sentence here and end what came before it with a period. Alternate translation: “They are perishing because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
106 2TH 2 10 rtua figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀγάπην τῆς ἀληθείας οὐκ ἐδέξαντο 1 in all deceit of unrighteousness If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **love** and **truth**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Also, your language might prefer an expression other than **love** for something as impersonal as **truth**. Alternate translation: “they did not want to consider the true message about Jesus to be important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
107 2TH 2 10 sl5b grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς τὸ σωθῆναι αὐτούς 1 in all deceit of unrighteousness This phrase could express: (1) the result of receiving the love of the truth. Alternate translation: “and thus be saved” or (2) the purpose of loving the truth. Alternate translation: “so that they could be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
108 2TH 2 10 xst1 figs-activepassive εἰς τὸ σωθῆναι αὐτούς 1 in all deceit of unrighteousness If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, that would be God. Alternate translation: “for God to save them” or “so that God would save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
109 2TH 2 11 sj1v grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ τοῦτο 1 because of this What follows **because of this** is the result of the action of the people who “did not receive the love of the truth” in verse 10. Use a connector that shows that what the people did in verse 10 is the reason for what follows in this verse. Alternate translation: “for this reason” or “because the people did not receive the love of the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
110 2TH 2 11 en8e figs-metaphor πέμπει αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς ἐνέργειαν πλάνης, εἰς τὸ πιστεῦσαι αὐτοὺς τῷ ψεύδει 1 God is sending them a working of error for them to believe the lie Paul is speaking of **God** allowing something to happen to people as if he is **sending** something to them. Alternate translation: “God is allowing them to think wrongly so that they believe the lies of the man of lawlessness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
111 2TH 2 11 u7a0 figs-possession ἐνέργειαν πλάνης 1 God is sending them a working of error for them to believe the lie Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **working** that is characterized by **error**. This means something that works to produce error in them. Alternate translation: “the ability to think in a wrong way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
112 2TH 2 11 nass grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς τὸ πιστεῦσαι αὐτοὺς 1 God is sending them a working of error for them to believe the lie Here, **for** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God sends the **working of error**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “so that they may believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
113 2TH 2 11 bkpm writing-pronouns εἰς τὸ πιστεῦσαι αὐτοὺς 1 God is sending them a working of error for them to believe the lie Here, **them** refers to the people who “did not receive the love of the truth” in verse 10. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that these people may believe” or “in order that the people who did not receive the love of the truth may believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
114 2TH 2 12 x33k grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 they might all be judged This phrase introduces a purpose clause. This follows the purpose clause of verse 11, so you may want to link them together. Alternate translation: “and furthermore, so that” or “and therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
115 2TH 2 12 d63e figs-activepassive κριθῶσιν πάντες 1 they might all be judged If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, that would be God. Alternate translation: “God may judge all of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
116 2TH 2 12 pkw8 writing-pronouns οἱ 1 those who have not believed the truth, but have taken pleasure in unrighteousness Here, **the ones** refers back to the people that Paul has described with similar terms in verse 10. These are the same people who “did not receive the love of the truth” and instead accepted the “deceit of unrighteousness.” You may want to start a new sentence here and end what came before with a period. Alternate translation: “Those are the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
117 2TH 2 12 m1cl figs-abstractnouns οἱ μὴ πιστεύσαντες τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, ἀλλὰ εὐδοκήσαντες τῇ ἀδικίᾳ 1 those who have not believed the truth, but have taken pleasure in unrighteousness If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **truth** and **unrighteousness**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “those who have not believed the true message but have enjoyed doing sinful things” or “those people who have rejected the true message about the Lord and instead have chosen to do what is wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
118 2TH 2 13 w83a checking/headings 0 General Information: Paul now changes topics. If you are using section headings, you could put one here before verse 13. Suggested heading: “Paul gives thanks to God for the believers and encourages them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]])
119 2TH 2 13 b3hh δὲ 1 Now The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to indicate/show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section.
120 2TH 2 13 dze5 figs-hyperbole ἡμεῖς & ὀφείλομεν εὐχαριστεῖν & πάντοτε 1 we ought always to give thanks The word **always** is a generalization. This is used to emphasize the importance of the action. If this is not natural in your language, you could use the alternative renderings given. Alternate translation: “we should continually give thanks” or “we must thank God at all times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
121 2TH 2 13 m418 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς & ὀφείλομεν 1 we ought Here, **we** refers to three men, Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy. If you have exclusive and inclusive first-person pronouns in your language, this should be an exclusive pronoun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
122 2TH 2 13 ia4x figs-activepassive ἀδελφοὶ ἠγαπημένοι ὑπὸ Κυρίου 1 brothers having been loved by the Lord If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for the Lord loves you, brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
123 2TH 2 13 v15j figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. If your readers understand that it is addressed only to men, you may need to use both the masculine and the feminine forms of that word in your language. If you use a nonfigurative word such as “believers”, see that both the genders are addressed. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
124 2TH 2 13 l7a8 figs-metaphor ἀπαρχὴν εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 as firstfruits for salvation in sanctification of the Spirit and belief in the truth Being among the first people to be saved is spoken of as if the Thessalonian believers were **firstfruits**. Alternate translation: “to be among the first people who believe” or “to be some of the first people whom God was saving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
125 2TH 2 13 bpqn figs-abstractnouns ἀπαρχὴν εἰς σωτηρίαν ἐν ἁγιασμῷ Πνεύματος καὶ πίστει ἀληθείας 1 as firstfruits for salvation in sanctification of the Spirit and belief in the truth If it would be clearer in your language, you could change the abstract nouns **salvation**, **sanctification**, **belief**, and **truth** into verbal forms. Alternate translation: “to be among the first people who believe what is true, and whom God has saved and set apart for himself by his Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
126 2TH 2 14 e0gy figs-ellipsis διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **through our gospel** does not mean that the gospel belongs to Paul and his companions. It refers to the gospel about Jesus that Paul and his companions preached. Alternate translation: “through the gospel that we preached to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
127 2TH 2 14 thmh figs-explicit εἰς περιποίησιν δόξης τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 The phrase **to the acquiring of the glory of our Lord Jesus Christ** does not mean that we will take over or divide up the glory of Jesus Christ. It means that the believers will share in Christ’s glory. Alternate translation: “so that you might share in the glory of our Lord Jesus Christ” or “in order that you might receive glory like our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
128 2TH 2 14 pke7 figs-abstractnouns εἰς περιποίησιν δόξης τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you can express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “so that you might become glorious like our Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
129 2TH 2 15 holv grammar-connect-logic-result ἄρα οὖν 1 The words **So then** connect this verse with verses 13 and 14 as their logical conclusion. Because God did the wonderful things in those verses, the Thessalonians should do what verse 15 says. Use a natural way to introduce a conclusion in your language. Alternate translation: “Therefore” or “Because God did all of that for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
130 2TH 2 15 pa9j figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **brothers** means fellow believers in Jesus, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
131 2TH 2 15 u9ss figs-metaphor στήκετε 1 So then, brothers, stand firm Here, the phrase **stand firm** is used to mean to not change one’s beliefs but, rather, to remain steadfast in what one believes. If this would be unclear in your language, consider using an equivalent expression, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “continue to believe the truth” or “do not give up your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
132 2TH 2 15 l4vr figs-metaphor κρατεῖτε τὰς παραδόσεις 1 hold tight to the traditions Here, **traditions** refers to the truths about Christ that Paul and the other apostles taught. Paul speaks of them as if his readers could hold on to them with their hands. Alternate translation: “do not give up believing those truths” or “continue to believe the true teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
133 2TH 2 15 cpdo figs-doublet στήκετε καὶ κρατεῖτε 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize the importance of doing this. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “keep on firmly believing” or “do not allow anyone to change your mind in any way about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
134 2TH 2 15 whp8 figs-activepassive ἐδιδάχθητε 1 you were taught If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “we have taught you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
135 2TH 2 15 z2vs figs-synecdoche διὰ λόγου 1 whether by word or by our letter Here, **by word** is an expression that means that Paul had been present with them and taught them personally. Alternate translation: “by what we said to you in person” or “when we were talking to you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
136 2TH 2 15 jrg4 figs-explicit δι’ ἐπιστολῆς ἡμῶν 1 whether by word or by our letter You can make clear the implicit information that **by our letter** refers to what Paul taught to the Thessalonians in an earlier letter (probably 1 Thessalonians). Alternate translation: “by what we wrote to you in a letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
137 2TH 2 16 g8m1 grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Now The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
138 2TH 2 16 njk1 translate-blessing αὐτὸς δὲ ὁ Κύριος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς ὁ Πατὴρ ἡμῶν 1 Connecting Statement: Paul ends this section with a blessing. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “Now may our Lord Jesus Christ himself, and God our Father” or “We pray that our Lord Jesus Christ himself, and God our Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
139 2TH 2 16 yge9 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν & ἡμᾶς 1 our Lord … who loved us and gave us The words **our** and **us** refer to all believers including the writers. If you have exclusive and inclusive first-person plural pronouns in your language, these should be inclusive pronouns. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
140 2TH 2 16 cm54 figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς & Κύριος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς 1 our Lord Jesus Christ himself Here, **himself** gives additional emphasis to the phrase **Lord Jesus Christ**. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “our Lord Jesus Christ, the very one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
141 2TH 2 16 h3gk figs-abstractnouns δοὺς παράκλησιν αἰωνίαν, καὶ ἐλπίδα ἀγαθὴν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **comfort** and **hope**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “always comforts us and has given us good things to hope for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
142 2TH 2 16 iirq figs-abstractnouns ἐν χάριτι 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because of how gracious he is to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
143 2TH 2 17 x3rr figs-metonymy παρακαλέσαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας, καὶ στηρίξαι 1 may he comfort and strengthen your hearts Here, the word **hearts** represents both the emotion and will of a person. If **hearts** does not mean this in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “may he give comfort and strength to your livers” or “may he comfort you and strengthen you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
144 2TH 2 17 yw5f figs-synecdoche ἐν παντὶ ἔργῳ καὶ λόγῳ ἀγαθῷ 1 every good work and word If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the phrase **work and word** with verbs. Alternative translation: “in every good thing that you do and say” or “so that you could do and say everything that is good.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
145 2TH 3 intro b8hk 0 # 2 Thessalonians 3 General Notes<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Idle and lazy persons<br><br>In Thessalonica, there apparently was a problem with people in the church who were able to work but refused to do so. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])<br><br>### What should you do if your brother sins?<br><br>In this chapter, Paul teaches that Christians need to live in a way that honors God. Christians should also encourage one another and hold each other accountable for what they do. The church is also responsible for encouraging believers to repent if they sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
146 2TH 3 1 k33i checking/headings 0 General Information: In verses 1–5, Paul asks the believers to pray for him and his companions and encourages them. A heading for this section might be, “Pray for Us.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]])
147 2TH 3 1 jy75 grammar-connect-words-phrases τὸ λοιπὸν 1 Finally Here, the word **Finally** marks a change in topic. To **pray** is not the final instruction that Paul gives but it is how Paul opens the last section of his letter where he will discuss a few remaining matters. Alternate translation: “One more thing” or “So, continuing on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
148 2TH 3 1 m1s5 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
149 2TH 3 1 v8k2 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 The pronoun **us** refers to Paul and his companions. If you have exclusive and inclusive first person pronouns in your language, this should be an exclusive pronoun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
150 2TH 3 1 r54v figs-metaphor τρέχῃ 1 so that the word of the Lord might run and might be glorified, just as also with you Paul speaks of God’s **word** spreading as if it were running from place to place. He is comparing the rapid spread of God’s word to a person who takes good news to others. Alternate translation: “might spread rapidly” or “might be heard by many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
151 2TH 3 1 yvkm figs-activepassive καὶ δοξάζηται 1 so that the word of the Lord might run and might be glorified, just as also with you You can state this in active form, if the passive construction is not natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and that many people would honor it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
152 2TH 3 1 egho figs-ellipsis καθὼς καὶ πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “just as also happened with you” or “which is exactly what you did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
153 2TH 3 2 xg2h figs-activepassive ῥυσθῶμεν 1 we might be rescued You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God may save us” or “God may rescue us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
154 2TH 3 2 h11p figs-doublet ἀτόπων καὶ πονηρῶν 1 The two terms **perverse** and **evil** mean basically the same thing and are used together to emphasize the amount of evil. If your language does not use repetition to do this or if you do not have two words for these attributes, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “very wicked men” or “many wicked men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
155 2TH 3 2 p1ct figs-litotes οὐ γὰρ πάντων ἡ πίστις 1 for not everyone has faith The phrase **not everyone** is a negative understatement that emphasizes how rare faith is. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “for only some people believe in the Lord” or “for people who believe in Jesus are few” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
156 2TH 3 2 appf figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “believes in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
157 2TH 3 3 yx9g figs-explicit ὃς στηρίξει 1 who will strengthen The word **strengthen** here refers to spiritual strength, not physical strength. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “who will strengthen you spiritually” or “who will make you inwardly strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
158 2TH 3 3 p91k τοῦ πονηροῦ 1 the evil one This could mean: (1) the evil being Satan. Alternate translation: “Satan” or (2) evil in general. Alternate translation: “evil”
159 2TH 3 4 xk85 figs-nominaladj πεποίθαμεν δὲ 1 we are confident The phrase **We are also confident** may be confusing in some languages. If that is the case in your language, you could translate this as a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “We also have faith” or “We also trust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
160 2TH 3 4 w79e figs-metaphor πεποίθαμεν δὲ ἐν Κυρίῳ ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς 1 This could mean: (1) Paul has confidence in the Thessalonian believers because of the close relationship that they have with the Lord Jesus. In this case, Paul is speaking of this relationship as if they were inside the Lord Jesus. Alternative translation: “Because you are united to the Lord, we are also confident” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) (2) Paul has confidence in the Lord Jesus, that he will cause them to do what is right. Alternative translation: “Because we trust in the Lord Jesus to enable you, we are also confident”
161 2TH 3 5 giz4 figs-metonymy ὁ & Κύριος κατευθύναι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 may the Lord direct your hearts Here, **hearts** stands for a person’s thoughts or mind. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “may the Lord cause you to understand the love of God and the endurance of Christ” or “may the Lord help you to know the love of God and the endurance of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
162 2TH 3 5 wre3 figs-metaphor εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 to the love of God and to the endurance of Christ Paul speaks of God’s **love** and Christ’s **endurance** as if they were destinations on a path. If your readers would not understand this figure of speech, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “to know how much God loves you and the endurance that Christ supplies you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
163 2TH 3 5 dzbn figs-possession εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **love of God** can mean (1) the love that comes from God. Alternate translation: “to know how much God loves you” or (2) the love that people give to God. Alternate translation: “to love God more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
164 2TH 3 5 ia7x figs-possession εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **endurance of Christ** can mean (1) the endurance that Christ gives to his people. Alternate translation: “to experience the endurance that Christ gives you” or (2) the endurance that Christ had through his suffering. Alternate translation: “to know how much Christ has endured for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
165 2TH 3 6 mst3 checking/headings 0 General Information: In verses 6–15, Paul gives the believers some final instructions about working and not being idle. A heading for this section might be, “Believers Must Work.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]])
166 2TH 3 6 v33v grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Now The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
167 2TH 3 6 x9l8 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί & ἀδελφοῦ 1 brothers Here, the words **brothers** and **brother** refer to fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … brother or sister” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
168 2TH 3 6 y4a9 figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in the name of our Lord Jesus Christ Here, **name** stands for the person of Jesus Christ. It can also mean “with the authority of.” If using this term is not clear in your language, you could express it directly. Alternate translation: “as if our Lord Jesus Christ himself were speaking” or “with the authority that our Lord Jesus Christ has given us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
169 2TH 3 6 jvw1 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 of our Lord Here, **our** refers to all believers. If you have exclusive and inclusive first-person plural pronouns in your language, this should be an inclusive pronoun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
170 2TH 3 6 x2r8 figs-metaphor ἀτάκτως περιπατοῦντος 1 Here Paul speaks of people who are not living well as if they walk in a haphazard manner. If your readers would not understand this metaphor, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “who is living in a bad way” or “who is not living correctly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
171 2TH 3 6 se1g τὴν παράδοσιν 1 Here, **the traditions** refers to the teachings that the apostles received from Jesus and are passing along to all believers. Alternate translation: “the teachings” or “the instructions”
172 2TH 3 7 h222 figs-explicit μιμεῖσθαι ἡμᾶς 1 to imitate us The phrase **to imitate** may be a difficult word to translate in your language. In that case, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “to act the way that my fellow workers and I act” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
173 2TH 3 7 b1i1 figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἠτακτήσαμεν ἐν ὑμῖν 1 we did not behave disorderly among you Paul uses a double negative to emphasize the positive. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “we lived among you as those who had much discipline” or “we worked diligently when we were with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
174 2TH 3 8 ruh3 translate-unknown ἄρτον 1 Paul refers to **bread** here because it was the most common and basic food for them. If your readers would not be familiar with **bread** or if that is a kind of food that would be considered unusual or extravagant, you could use a general expression for ordinary food. Alternate translation: “food” or “anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
175 2TH 3 8 d9h1 figs-merism νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας ἐργαζόμενοι 1 working night and day Here, **night and day** forms a merism, which means “all the time.” If it would be helpful in your language to explain that they did not work without taking any rest whatsoever, then you could make the meaning clear. Alternate translation: “working throughout that time with little rest” or “we worked almost continuously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
176 2TH 3 8 w8fq figs-doublet ἐν κόπῳ καὶ μόχθῳ 1 in toil and hardship Here, **toil** and **hardship** have very similar meanings. Paul used this repetition to emphasize that they worked very hard. If you do not have two similar words that you can use here or if it would be unnatural for you to use such repetition, you could emphasize this in another way. Alternate translation: “with great effort” or “in very difficult circumstances” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
177 2TH 3 9 sn3k figs-doublenegatives οὐχ ὅτι οὐκ ἔχομεν ἐξουσίαν, ἀλλ’ 1 not because we do not have authority, but Paul uses a double negative to emphasize the positive. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “and we certainly have the right to receive food from you, but instead we worked for our food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
178 2TH 3 9 lrjr figs-abstractnouns ἑαυτοὺς τύπον δῶμεν ὑμῖν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **example**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “we might show you the right way in order for you” or “we might demonstrate the way to live for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
179 2TH 3 9 z0up μιμεῖσθαι 1 See how you translated **imitate** in verse 7.
180 2TH 3 10 c652 figs-doublenegatives εἴ τις οὐ θέλει ἐργάζεσθαι, μηδὲ ἐσθιέτω 1 If anyone is not willing to work, do not even let him eat You can state this in positive form, if this form is difficult to understand in your language. Alternate translation: “If a person wants to eat, he must work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
181 2TH 3 11 ey6c figs-metaphor τινας περιπατοῦντας & ἀτάκτως 1 some who are walking idly Here, **walking** stands for behavior in life. you can use an equivalent metaphor from your culture, if it is available. Otherwise, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “some who are living idle lives” or “some who are being lazy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
182 2TH 3 11 iv1z translate-unknown ἀλλὰ περιεργαζομένους 1 but meddling Meddlers are people who interfere in the affairs of others without being asked to help. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
183 2TH 3 12 bm6z figs-abstractnouns μετὰ ἡσυχίας 1 with quietness Here, **with quietness** is the opposite of meddling. Paul exhorts the meddlers to stop getting involved in other people’s affairs. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **quietness**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in a quiet and peaceful manner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
184 2TH 3 13 jx8t grammar-connect-logic-contrast δέ 1 But Paul here uses the word **But** to contrast the lazy believers with the hardworking believers. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Concerning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
185 2TH 3 13 e59v figs-you ὑμεῖς 1 you The word **you** refers to all the Thessalonian believers, so it should be in plural form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
186 2TH 3 13 usu9 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
187 2TH 3 14 mzs4 figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ ἡμῶν 1 if anyone does not obey our word Paul is referring to his command to the Thessalonian believers as a **word**. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “our instructions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
188 2TH 3 14 nv3v figs-idiom τοῦτον σημειοῦσθε 1 note this one Paul wants the Thessalonians to notice who this person is. Alternate translation: “point out that person” or “make sure everyone knows who he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
189 2TH 3 14 y552 figs-explicit ἵνα ἐντραπῇ 1 so that he may be put to shame Paul instructs believers to avoid lazy believers as a disciplinary action. If necessary, you could make this explicit to make the meaning clear. Alternate translation: “in order that he will know that his laziness is wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
190 2TH 3 15 idj6 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφόν 1 Although the term **brother** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
191 2TH 3 16 nef4 checking/headings 0 General Information: In verses 16–18, Paul makes closing remarks to the believers at Thessalonica. A heading for this section might be, “Closing Remarks.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]])
192 2TH 3 16 z1zs grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
193 2TH 3 16 whb9 translate-blessing αὐτὸς & ὁ Κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης, δῴη ὑμῖν 1 may the Lord of peace himself give you Paul ends the letter with blessings that are also prayers. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing or prayer in your language. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord of peace himself may give you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
194 2TH 3 16 zl1s figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς & ὁ Κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης 1 the Lord of peace himself Here, **himself** emphasizes that the Lord is the source of peace and that he will personally give peace to believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
195 2TH 3 17 c2cb ὁ ἀσπασμὸς τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ, Παύλου, ὅ ἐστιν σημεῖον ἐν πάσῃ ἐπιστολῇ, οὕτως γράφω 1 This greeting is in my own hand—Paul—which is a sign in every letter. In this manner I write Alternate translation: “I, Paul, write this greeting with my own hand, which I do in every letter, as a sign that this letter is truly from me because this is how I write”
196 2TH 3 17 e3sa figs-idiom τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ 1 Here, the phrase **in my own hand** is an idiom meaning “in my own handwriting.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I myself am writing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
197 2TH 3 17 wg3f figs-explicit οὕτως γράφω 1 In this manner I write Paul makes it clear that this letter is from him and is not a forgery. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you could know that the letter is from me because this is how I write” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
198 2TH 3 18 h18b translate-blessing ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, μετὰ πάντων ὑμῶν 1 Paul ends the letter with one more blessing. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “I pray that the grace of our Lord Jesus Christ will be with you all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])

198
tn_2TH.tsv Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,198 @@
Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
front:intro krd6 0 # Introduction to 2 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the book of 2 Thessalonians\n\n1. Greetings and thanksgiving (1:12)\n1. Believers suffer from persecution (1:312)\n * God uses persecution to increase faith, love, and endurance in believers (1:34)\n * God is just: (1:512)\n * God will make believers worthy of his kingdom\n * God will give relief to believers\n * God will punish those who persecute believers\n1. Some believers misunderstand about the second coming of Christ (2:112)\n * Christs return has not yet happened (2:12)\n * Instruction about the events that will precede the return of Christ (2:312)\n1. Pauls confidence that God will save the Thessalonian believers (2:1317)\n * Paul calls the Thessalonian believers to “stand firm” (2:1315)\n * Paul prays that God will comfort them (2:1617)\n1. Paul requests that the Thessalonian believers pray for him (3:15)\n1. Paul give commands about idle believers (3:615)\n1. Closing (3:1617)\n\n### Who wrote 2 Thessalonians?\n\nPaul wrote 2 Thessalonians. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted believers. After he became a believer, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nPaul is the author of this letter, but he includes Silvanus and Timothy as senders of the letter. Paul wrote this letter while he, Silvanus, and Timothy were staying in the city of Corinth.\n\n### What is the book of 2 Thessalonians about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He encouraged the believers because they were being persecuted. He told them to continue living in a way that pleased God. He also wanted to teach them again about Christs return. He also warned them that they should not be idle but should work as they wait for Christ to return.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Thessalonians” or “Second Thessalonians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Pauls Second Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The Second Letter to the Christians/believers in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?\n\nPaul wrote much in this letter about Jesus eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation. And he will cause there to be peace everywhere. Paul also explained that a “man of lawlessness” will come before Christs return. This person will obey Satan and cause many people to oppose God. But Jesus will destroy this person when he returns.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?\n\nPaul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n### How are pronouns used in this letter?\n\nIn this letter, the words “we” and “us” refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. If your language differentiates between inclusive and exclusive pronouns, use an exclusive pronoun for these. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\nIn this letter, the words “you” and “your” are plural and refer to the Thessalonian believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the book of 2 Thessalonians?\n\nFor the following verses, some ancient manuscripts have a different reading than others. The ULT follows the reading that scholars consider to be the most accurate and puts the other reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in your area that your people are familiar with, consider using the reading that it follows. If not, translators are advised to follow the reading in the ULT.\n* “and the man of lawlessness is revealed” (2:3). The ULT, UST, and most modern versions read this way. Other versions follow the reading, “and the man of sin is revealed.”\n* “For God chose you as the firstfruits for salvation” (2:13) The ULT, UST, and some other versions read this way. The other reading is, “For God chose you from the first/beginning for salvation.”\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1:intro m987 0 # 2 Thessalonians 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nVerses 12 formally introduce this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type in which the sender identified himself, then the recipient, then gave a greeting.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Paradox\n\nA paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible.\n\nA paradox occurs in verses 45 where Paul talks about the Thessalonian believers faithfulness through persecution as “evidence of the righteous judgment of God.” People would not normally think that believing in God while being persecuted is a sign of Gods righteous judgment. But the fact that God gave them the ability to persevere in their faith is evidence that God claims them as his own and will judge them as worthy of his kingdom. In verses 510, Paul goes on to explain more of Gods righteous judgment, that God will reward those who believe in him and that he will punish those who afflict his people. ([2 Thessalonians 1:45](./04.md))\n\nAnother paradox occurs in verse 9 where Paul describes the penalty for rejecting God as “eternal destruction.” Normally when something is destroyed it ceases to exist. But in this case, the people who reject God will experience eternal separation from God, as the verse goes on to explain. Being separated from God destroys all that was enjoyable about their lives, and this continuous destruction is what they experience through eternity. ([2 Thessalonians 1:9](../01/09.md))
1:1 hm3e rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σιλουανὸς 1 **Silvanus** is the Latin form of “Silas.” **Silvanus** is the name of a man, the same person listed in the book of Acts as Pauls fellow traveler. If your readers may not know that these two are the same person, you could use the name “Silas” in the text and “Silvanus” in the footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:1 ge00 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος; τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 You may want to fill in the words necessary to make this a complete sentence. Alternate translation: “Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy send this letter to the church” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis)
1:1 l8q8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος 1 Although **Paul** wrote this letter, he identifies **Silvanus and Timothy** as also sending it. This means that they were with him and were in agreement with it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make that clear, as in the UST. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit)
1:1 eajo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Θεῷ Πατρὶ ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ 1 Here Paul speaks of the believers as though they were occupying space inside of God and Jesus. This metaphor expresses the idea that believers are spiritually united to God and Jesus. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “united to God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” or “sharing life with God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
1:2 g6rb rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Many languages have different ways to offer good wishes as they greet. Paul greeted his letter recipients with a blessing. Use a form that would be a good wish or blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “We pray that God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ give you grace and peace” or “I wish you grace and peace from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” or “May the grace and peace of God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ be your portion” or “May God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ show grace and give peace to your hearts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
1:2 bv9m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **Grace** and **peace**, you can express these ideas as verbs or in another way. Alternate translation: “May God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ be gracious to you and give rest to your inner being” or “...be favorable to you and make you at ease” or “...be kind to you and set your heart at rest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:3 o6v9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 312, Paul gives thanks for the believers in Thessalonica and prays for them. A heading for this section might be, “Thanks and Prayers.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
1:3 m6z5 εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν & πάντοτε 1 # General Information:\n\nPaul here uses the word **ought** to express that he has a moral obligation to God to **give thanks** for the believers in Thessalonica. Use a natural expression for this in your language. Alternate translation: “We are bound always to thank” or “We can do no other than to thank” or “We must give thanks continually to”
1:3 ea59 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε 1 Paul uses **always** as a generalization meaning “often” or “regularly.” Alternate translation: “We should often give thanks to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1:3 o01t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε περὶ ὑμῶν, ἀδελφοί 1 If your readers might think that Paul is expressing an obligation only and that he does not actually pray for the Thessalonians, you could express the reality explicitly. Alternate translation: “We always thank God for you, brothers, as we ought” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:3 h6t9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. If your readers understand that it is addressed only to men, you may need to use both the masculine and the feminine forms of that word in your language. If you use a nonfigurative word such as “believers”, see that both the genders are addressed. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1:3 ezaf rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καθὼς ἄξιόν ἐστιν 1 If it is difficult to express **just as it is fitting** in your language or if it is unclear what **it** refers to, consider starting a new sentence here to state it clearly. Alternate translation: “When we give thanks for you we are doing the right thing” or “Giving thanks for you is right for us to be doing” or “ & is the right thing to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1:3 emu9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὑπεραυξάνει ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you can express this idea as a verb. Alternate translation: “you believe in Christ more and more” or “you increasingly trust in Christ” or “you rely on Christ more each day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:3 xy7k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πλεονάζει ἡ ἀγάπη ἑνὸς ἑκάστου, πάντων ὑμῶν, εἰς ἀλλήλους 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you can express this idea as a verb. Alternate translation: “each of you sincerely loves one another more and more” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:3 bmn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ἀλλήλους 1 Here, **one another** means fellow believers. Alternate translation: “each other” or “each believer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1:4 kx1n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτοὺς ἡμᾶς 1 Here, **ourselves** is added to **we** to emphasize that even the apostle Paul and his associates are boasting about the Thessalonian believers. Alternate translation: “even we” or “we are the ones who” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns)
1:4 gcth rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς ὑπομονῆς ὑμῶν, καὶ πίστεως 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **endurance** and **faith** or if it is unclear how these two terms relate, you can express these same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how you patiently continue to trust in Jesus” or “how you persevere in believing in the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:4 qlo9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς διωγμοῖς ὑμῶν, καὶ ταῖς θλίψεσιν 1 The two words **persecutions** and **afflictions** are saying very similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize how difficult life has been for the Thessalonian believers. If two words are difficult to find in your language or if your language does not use repetition in this way, you can use one word with this meaning and make the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “as you have been going through all these very difficult times” or “as people make you suffer in all the ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1:4 md0d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πίστεως ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς διωγμοῖς ὑμῶν 1 Here, **faith in all your persecutions** does not mean to believe in or trust in persecutions. If your readers might be confused by that, you could express it more clearly. Alternate translation: “faith in Jesus Christ during all the times you are persecuted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:5 rs3b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔνδειγμα τῆς δικαίας κρίσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰς τὸ καταξιωθῆναι ὑμᾶς 1 The **evidence** that Paul is referring to here is the faithful endurance of the Thessalonian believers while suffering persecution, which he mentioned in verse 4. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. It may also be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Your endurance while suffering is a clear indication of Gods righteous judgment, that he considers you worthy” or “Your faithfulness through persecution shows that God is just and right to consider you worthy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:5 dad9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰς τὸ καταξιωθῆναι ὑμᾶς τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that God will consider you worthy to be part of his kingdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:5 xm2g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑπὲρ ἧς καὶ πάσχετε 1 Here, **also** could mean: (1) the Thessalonian believers are suffering for the kingdom of God as well as being counted worthy of it. Alternate translation: “being a part of which is also the reason that you are suffering” (2) the Thessalonian believers are suffering along with other believers. Alternate translation: “which is why you are going through sufferings along with many others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:6 cxx1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴπερ δίκαιον παρὰ Θεῷ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you know that God is just” or “for God is certainly right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1:6 id3i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor παρὰ Θεῷ, ἀνταποδοῦναι τοῖς θλίβουσιν ὑμᾶς θλῖψιν 1 Here, **to return** means to cause someone to experience the same thing that they did to someone else as though the same action were bouncing back onto the people who did that action. Use a natural expression for this kind of reciprocal action. Alternate translation: “for God to afflict those who are afflicting you” or “for God to pay back those who are afflicting you” “for God to do the same to those who are afflicting you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:6 zemk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀνταποδοῦναι τοῖς θλίβουσιν ὑμᾶς θλῖψιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **affliction**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to afflict those who are afflicting you” or “to trouble those who are troubling you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:7 hxy2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ ὑμῖν & ἄνεσιν 1 The words **and relief to you** continue the description of what God is right “to return” to people (verse 6). If this would not be understood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and it is righteous for God to give relief to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1:7 l3ht rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καὶ ὑμῖν τοῖς θλιβομένοις, ἄνεσιν μεθ’ ἡμῶν 1 Here, **you who are being afflicted** refers to the Thessalonian believers, and **us** refers to Paul and his associates. Other people are afflicting both groups because of their faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “and relief to you who are being afflicted just as we are being afflicted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1:7 knbb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὑμῖν & ἄνεσιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **relief**, you can express this idea with a verb or in another way. Alternate translation: “to relieve you” or “to rescue you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:7 bcxy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῖς θλιβομένοις 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom other people are afflicting” or “from the affliction that others are causing you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:7 fh5g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῇ ἀποκαλύψει τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, **at the revealing** is an indication of the time when the suffering believers will have relief from their suffering. Alternate translation: “at the time when the Lord Jesus is revealed” or “when everyone sees the Lord Jesus coming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:8 p1ie rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διδόντος ἐκδίκησιν τοῖς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **vengeance**, you can express this idea in another way. Since this is part of Gods justice, do not use a word that implies that God is doing something illegal or inappropriate. Alternate translation: “punishing the people” or “judging the ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:8 ynt4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῖς μὴ εἰδόσι Θεὸν 1 Here, **the ones not having known God** refers to those who have refused the relationship with God that he had offered to them. Alternate translation: “on those who did not want to know God” or “on those who have rejected God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:8 gv0v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ τοῖς μὴ ὑπακούουσιν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1 The phrase, **not obeying the gospel** could refer to: (1) the same people as **those not having known God**. Alternate translation: “and who are not obeying the gospel” (2) a separate group. Alternate translation: “and also on those who are not obeying the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:8 m37v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὑπακούουσιν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1 The phrase, **obeying the gospel** is an idiom that means to live according to everything that God tells us in the gospel message. Alternate translation: “living according to the message of the gospel” or “heeding the admonitions that are part of the gospel message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:8 dkkx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the general possessive form **of our Lord Jesus** to describe **the gospel**. The specific meaning here is that the gospel is about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the gospel that is about our Lord Jesus” or “the gospel message that tells us about our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1:9 plw5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἵτινες δίκην τίσουσιν 1 Here, **who** refers to the people who are not obeying the gospel, not to the Lord Jesus. You may prefer to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Those people will pay the penalty” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1:9 peog rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οἵτινες δίκην τίσουσιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of the word **penalty**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who will be punished by God” or “whom God will punish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:9 ebf1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom δίκην τίσουσιν 1 Here, the phrase **pay the penalty** is an idiom meaning to suffer the consequences of doing something bad. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “will suffer the consequences” or “will undergo the retribution” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:9 yruv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὄλεθρον αἰώνιον 1 Here, **eternal destruction** further describes the **penalty** that people will experience if they refuse to “obey the gospel.” The **destruction** that these people will experience is **eternal**, that is, it never ends. Therefore, do not translate with the meaning that these people will cease to exist. They will continue to exist, but continually experience the ruin of their lives. If necessary, put this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “God will punish them eternally” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:9 qhta rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Here, **the face of the Lord** is an idiom meaning the presence of the Lord. Alternate translation: “away from our Lord Jesus” or “separated from the presence of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:9 htqg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῆς δόξης τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ 1 Here, the possessive form is describing **power** that has **glory**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “glorious” to describe the **power**. Alternate translation: “his glorious power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1:9 wmdm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς δόξης τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **glory** and **power**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “experiencing how magnificent and powerful he is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:10 ugk9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅταν ἔλθῃ & ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ 1 Here, **that day** is the day when Jesus will return to the world. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the day when Jesus returns to the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:10 bi2u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐνδοξασθῆναι ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις αὐτοῦ, καὶ θαυμασθῆναι ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς πιστεύσασιν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as his saints glorify him and all those who have believed marvel at him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:10 wsvb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἐνδοξασθῆναι ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις αὐτοῦ, καὶ θαυμασθῆναι 1 Here, the two verbs **to be glorified**and **to be marveled at** indicate the result of Jesus coming, not the purpose. Use a connector here that indicates result. Alternate translation: “as his saints glorify him and all those who have believed marvel at him” or “with the result that his saints will glorify him and all those who have believed will marvel at him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:10 z1hg ἐνδοξασθῆναι ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις αὐτοῦ, καὶ θαυμασθῆναι ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς πιστεύσασιν 1 The **saints** and **the ones having believed** are one group of people, not two. If your readers might be confused by this, you could combine these into one phrase. Alternate translation: “with the result that all of his saints, that is, the believers, will glorify him and marvel at him” or “as all of his people glorify him and marvel at him”
1:10 e56p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπιστεύθη τὸ μαρτύριον ἡμῶν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you have believed our witness when we shared it with you” or “when we testified about the saving power of Jesus Christ, you believed what we said” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive)
1:11 zy14 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς ὃ 1 Here, **For this** connects verse 11 to verse 10, so that verse 11 gives the means or method (prayer for the Thessalonian believers) for reaching the purpose that verse 10 has just described (for Jesus to “be glorified & and marveled at”). Use a natural way in your language for introducing this relationship. Alternate translation: “This is why” or “To this end” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1:11 ik19 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole καὶ προσευχόμεθα πάντοτε περὶ ὑμῶν 1 Paul is using **always** as an exaggeration in order to emphasize how often he prays for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “we also pray regularly for you” or “we continue to pray for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1:11 hiv9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς κλήσεως 1 Here, **calling** refers to God appointing or choosing people to belong to him and to proclaim his message of salvation through Jesus. Alternate translation: “to appoint you to belong to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:11 r8gk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πληρώσῃ πᾶσαν εὐδοκίαν ἀγαθωσύνης, καὶ ἔργον πίστεως ἐν δυνάμει 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **desire**, **goodness**, **faith**, and **power**, you can express these ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “he may make you able to do all of the good things that you want to do because you trust in Jesus and because God is powerful” or “he may empower you to act on what you believe in order to do good things in every way that you desire, because God is powerful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:11 c7o6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ πληρώσῃ 1 Here, **and he may fulfill** adds another reason why Paul and his associates **pray always** for the Thessalonian believers. This part of the sentence assumes some of the words from earlier in the sentence. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the earlier part of the sentence. Alternate translation: “and we also pray so that he may fulfill” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1:12 nvth rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ὅπως 1 Here, **so that** introduces the purpose for which Paul and his associates pray all of the things mentioned in verse 11. It is a repetition of the same purpose that was given in verse 10, using similar words. Alternate translation: “and we also pray so that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1:12 c6ec rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, **the name of our Lord Jesus** stands for the person of the Lord Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the reputation of our Lord Jesus” or “our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:12 q994 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὅπως ἐνδοξασθῇ τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ, ἐν ὑμῖν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. This could mean: (1) the Thessalonian believers will glorify Jesus. Alternate translation: “so that you would glorify the name of our Lord Jesus” (2) others will glorify Jesus because of what he has done for the Thessalonian believers. Alternate translation: “so that people would glorify the name of our Lord Jesus because of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:12 pg2i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν αὐτῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and Jesus might glorify you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:12 l4l1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν αὐτῷ 1 The phrase **and you in him** leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could make a complete sentence by supplying these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and so that you might be glorified in him” or “and so that he might glorify you” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis)
1:12 z8k9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κατὰ τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to how exceedingly kind our God and the Lord Jesus Christ are to you” or “as our God and the Lord Jesus Christ continue to abundantly bless you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:12 z1my τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 The phrase translated as **our God and the Lord Jesus Christ** could refer to: (1) two persons of the Trinity, God the Father and Jesus the Son. (2) one person, Jesus, who is both God and Lord. Alternate translation: “of our God and Lord, Jesus Christ”
2:intro jq9r 0 # 2 Thessalonians 2 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Man of lawlessness\n\nThis person is also called “the son of destruction” and “the lawless one” in this chapter. He is not Satan, but he is empowered by Satan and is the leader of those who do Satans evil work in the world in the last days. He is certainly one of the “antichrists” mentioned by John (1 John 2:18) and may be the final one, described as a beast in Revelation 13. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]])\n\n### Sits in the temple of God\n\nPaul could be referring to the Jerusalem temple that the Romans destroyed several years after he wrote this letter. Or he could be referring to a future physical temple, or to the church as the spiritual temple of God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:1 r36t rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 112, Paul exhorts believers not to be deceived about the day Jesus will come back and warns them about the coming man of lawlessness. A heading for this section might be, “The Man of Lawlessness” or “The Deception before Jesus Returns.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
2:1 q1uq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2:1 uy4z rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ὑπὲρ τῆς παρουσίας τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἡμῶν ἐπισυναγωγῆς ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 The **coming of our Lord Jesus Christ** and **our gathering to him** are two actions that happen at the same time. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “regarding the time of our Lord Jesus coming when we will be gathered together unto him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
2:1 sx2f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὑπὲρ τῆς παρουσίας τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἡμῶν ἐπισυναγωγῆς ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 If it is more natural in your language, you could use active verbs for the events of **coming** and **gathering**. Alternate translation: “about the time when our Lord Jesus will come and gather us to himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:1 cvg5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2:2 b8b2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives εἰς τὸ μὴ ταχέως σαλευθῆναι ὑμᾶς ἀπὸ τοῦ νοὸς 1 The phrase **shaken in your mind** refers to a persons thoughts being unsettled. You could also express this positively. Alternate translation: “for you to remain firm in your thinking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2:2 fj52 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μηδὲ θροεῖσθαι 1 The phrase **to be troubled** refers to a persons emotions being unsettled. You could also express this positively. Alternate translation: “and remain peaceful when a message comes” or “and keep calm when you hear something” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2:2 d334 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis μήτε διὰ πνεύματος, μήτε διὰ λόγου, μήτε δι’ ἐπιστολῆς, ὡς δι’ ἡμῶν 1 Paul is leaving out some words here that might be necessary in your language. If it is helpful, you could supply these words. Alternate translation: “when you receive a message either by means of a spirit or by means of a spoken word or by means of a written letter that pretends to be coming from us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2:2 ll80 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὡς δι’ ἡμῶν 1 Paul is leaving out some words here that might be necessary in your language. If it is helpful, you could supply these words. Alternate translation: “that claims to have come from us” or “trying to deceive you that it is from us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2:2 k4dk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὡς ὅτι 1 Paul is leaving out some words here that might be necessary in your language. If it is helpful, you could supply these words. Alternate translation: “that talks as if” or “that falsely claims that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2:2 ib6m ἡ ἡμέρα τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Here, **the day of the Lord** refers to the time when Jesus will come back to the earth for all believers.
2:3 l9c5 μή τις ὑμᾶς ἐξαπατήσῃ κατὰ μηδένα τρόπον 1 # General Information:\n\nAlternate translation: “Do not permit anyone to fool you” or “Do not believe at all the wrong words that people are telling you about this”
2:3 ej66 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὅτι ἐὰν μὴ ἔλθῃ ἡ ἀποστασία πρῶτον 1 Here, Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “for the day of the Lord will not come unless the apostacy comes first” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2:3 y7ch rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἀποστασία 1 Here, **the apostacy** refers to a future time when many people will turn away from God. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express it in another way. Alternate translation: “the time when many people will rebel against God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:3 e86v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀποκαλυφθῇ ὁ ἄνθρωπος τῆς ἀνομίας 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the man of lawlessness arrives” or “the man of lawlessness makes himself known” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:3 jsyj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὁ ἄνθρωπος τῆς ἀνομίας 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **man** who is characterized by **lawlessness**. By this Paul means that this man will oppose all of Gods commandments and instructions. If this is not clear in your language, you could express this another way. Alternate translation: “the lawless man” or “the man who opposes Gods rule” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2:3 tkg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας 1 Here, **son of destruction** is an idiom meaning a person who is destined for destruction. Alternate translation: “the one who will be destroyed” or “the one whom God will destroy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:3 x6p0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας 1 God will destroy this person some time after the events of verse 4. If it would be clearer in your language, consider moving this phrase to the end of verse 4. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
2:4 t485 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πάντα λεγόμενον θεὸν ἢ σέβασμα 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “everything that people call God or whatever they worship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:4 sk8t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture αὐτὸν & καθίσαι 1 Here, **he himself sits** is part of a description of the kinds of things that this person does. If it is confusing in your language to use the present tense for this, you could use the future tense, since this will happen in the future. Alternate translation: “he himself will sit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
2:4 wj33 ἀποδεικνύντα ἑαυτὸν ὅτι ἔστιν Θεός 1 Here, **showing that he himself is God** does not mean that this man is God, but only that he is displaying himself to the world as though he were God. Alternate translation: “showing himself as God” or “attempting to demonstrate to people that he himself is God”
2:5 rsz1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐ μνημονεύετε ὅτι, ἔτι ὢν πρὸς ὑμᾶς, ταῦτα ἔλεγον ὑμῖν 1 Paul is not asking for information here, but is using the question form to remind the Thessalonians of what he taught when he was with them previously. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2:5 lkk7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 Here, **these things** refers to the topics that Paul mentioned in verses 3 and 4, including the rebellion against God, the man of lawlessness, and the return of Jesus on the day of the Lord. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:6 hph0 καὶ νῦν τὸ κατέχον οἴδατε 1 There are two possibilities for understanding the function of the word **now** here. (1) It goes with **the one restraining {him}**. Alternate translation: “And you know what is restraining him now” or (2) it goes with **you know**. Alternate translation: “And now you know what is restraining him”
2:6 ask4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ ἀποκαλυφθῆναι αὐτὸν ἐν τῷ αὐτοῦ καιρῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the proper time, when God will allow him to reveal himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:7 faa5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast γὰρ 1 Here, the word translated **For** serves to connect this sentence as a contrast to what Paul has said about **lawlessness**, starting in verse 3. Until here, Paul was talking about lawlessness in the future, but now he wants to clarify that people are already being lawless.Use a natural way in your language for introducing this contrast. Alternate translation: “Now” or “Actually,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2:7 si9i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ & μυστήριον ἤδη ἐνεργεῖται τῆς ἀνομίας 1 Here, **lawlessness** is characterized as a **mystery** because we cannot understand why people rebel against Gods wise instructions unless we understand the spiritual forces at work, which Paul explains here. If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you can express them in another way. Alternate translation: “people are already mysteriously rebelling against God” or “Satan is already secretly leading people to reject Gods laws, as this man will do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:7 fcu7 ὁ κατέχων 1 To restrain someone is to hold him back or to keep him from doing what he wants to do. Alternate translation: “the one who has been holding him back”
2:7 bijc rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns γένηται 1 Here, **he** refers to the one who is restraining the man of lawlessness. If this is not clear to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who restrains the man of lawlessness moves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:7 tt88 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκ μέσου γένηται 1 Here Paul speaks of the person who is restraining the man of lawlessness as though he were standing in front of him and blocking his path. If this does not make sense in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor or you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “he stops restraining him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:8 hn67 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ τότε ἀποκαλυφθήσεται ὁ ἄνομος 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and then God will allow the lawless one to show himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:8 vay9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 In this figure of speech, **breath** represents the power of God and **mouth** represents the spoken word of Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “by the power of his spoken word” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:8 hy3y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἀνελεῖ τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ, καὶ καταργήσει τῇ ἐπιφανείᾳ τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ 1 These two phrases describe the same event. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize how much more powerful Jesus is than the man of lawlessness. If it is confusing for your readers to talk about killing someone and then bringing him to nothing, you could reverse the order of the phrases, as in the UST, or you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “will destroy by his glorious appearance and with the breath of his mouth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
2:9 sp9v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession οὗ ἐστιν ἡ παρουσία, κατ’ ἐνέργειαν τοῦ Σατανᾶ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **work** that **Satan** does. If this is not clear in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Satan will bring this man and will work through him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2:9 rikg οὗ 1 Here, **whom** refers back to the man of lawlessness. Alternate translation: “of the man of lawlessness”
2:9 bd5m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐν πάσῃ δυνάμει, καὶ σημείοις, καὶ τέρασιν ψεύδους 1 Here, **all** is hyperbole. It can apply to: (1) only **power**, with the meaning “much” or “great.” Alternate translation: “with great power to do signs and false wonders” or (2) **power**, **signs**, and **wonders**, with the meaning “many kinds of.” Alternate translation: “with many kinds of power, signs, and false wonders” or (3) a combination of the two. Alternate translation: “with much power to do all kinds of signs and false wonders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2:9 kcaw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν πάσῃ δυνάμει, καὶ σημείοις, καὶ τέρασιν ψεύδους 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **power**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “with very powerful signs and false wonders” or “who made him very powerful to do signs and false wonders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:9 fjfn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet καὶ σημείοις, καὶ τέρασιν ψεύδους 1 The words **signs** and **wonders** often occur together and mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how amazing they are. If your language does not have two words for this or does not use repetition to do this, you can use one word and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “and amazing false miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2:10 tf75 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάσῃ 1 Here, **all** is hyperbole and could mean: (1) “a high degree of” or (2) “many kinds of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2:10 ippb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐν πάσῃ ἀπάτῃ ἀδικίας 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **deceit** that results from **unrighteousness**. If the relationship of the words is not clear in your language, you could express it more explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he is so unrighteous, he will be very deceptive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2:10 b55e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν πάσῃ ἀπάτῃ ἀδικίας, τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **deceit** and **unrighteousness**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “because he is so unrighteous, he will completely deceive those who are perishing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:10 e8hi rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἀνθ’ ὧν 1 What follows this phrase is the reason that the people are perishing. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason. You may want to start a new sentence here and end what came before it with a period. Alternate translation: “They are perishing because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2:10 rtua rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀγάπην τῆς ἀληθείας οὐκ ἐδέξαντο 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **love** and **truth**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Also, your language might prefer an expression other than **love** for something as impersonal as **truth**. Alternate translation: “they did not want to consider the true message about Jesus to be important” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:10 sl5b rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς τὸ σωθῆναι αὐτούς 1 This phrase could express: (1) the result of receiving the love of the truth. Alternate translation: “and thus be saved” or (2) the purpose of loving the truth. Alternate translation: “so that they could be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2:10 xst1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰς τὸ σωθῆναι αὐτούς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, that would be God. Alternate translation: “for God to save them” or “so that God would save them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:11 sj1v rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ τοῦτο 1 What follows **because of this** is the result of the action of the people who “did not receive the love of the truth” in verse 10. Use a connector that shows that what the people did in verse 10 is the reason for what follows in this verse. Alternate translation: “for this reason” or “because the people did not receive the love of the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2:11 en8e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πέμπει αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς ἐνέργειαν πλάνης, εἰς τὸ πιστεῦσαι αὐτοὺς τῷ ψεύδει 1 Paul is speaking of **God** allowing something to happen to people as if he is **sending** something to them. Alternate translation: “God is allowing them to think wrongly so that they believe the lies of the man of lawlessness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:11 u7a0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐνέργειαν πλάνης 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **working** that is characterized by **error**. This means something that works to produce error in them. Alternate translation: “the ability to think in a wrong way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2:11 nass rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς τὸ πιστεῦσαι αὐτοὺς 1 Here, **for** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God sends the **working of error**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “so that they may believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2:11 bkpm rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns εἰς τὸ πιστεῦσαι αὐτοὺς 1 Here, **them** refers to the people who “did not receive the love of the truth” in verse 10. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that these people may believe” or “in order that the people who did not receive the love of the truth may believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:12 x33k rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 This phrase introduces a purpose clause. This follows the purpose clause of verse 11, so you may want to link them together. Alternate translation: “and furthermore, so that” or “and therefore” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2:12 d63e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κριθῶσιν πάντες 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, that would be God. Alternate translation: “God may judge all of them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:12 pkw8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἱ 1 Here, **the ones** refers back to the people that Paul has described with similar terms in verse 10. These are the same people who “did not receive the love of the truth” and instead accepted the “deceit of unrighteousness.” You may want to start a new sentence here and end what came before with a period. Alternate translation: “Those are the people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:12 m1cl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οἱ μὴ πιστεύσαντες τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, ἀλλὰ εὐδοκήσαντες τῇ ἀδικίᾳ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **truth** and **unrighteousness**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “those who have not believed the true message but have enjoyed doing sinful things” or “those people who have rejected the true message about the Lord and instead have chosen to do what is wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:13 w83a rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul now changes topics. If you are using section headings, you could put one here before verse 13. Suggested heading: “Paul gives thanks to God for the believers and encourages them.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
2:13 b3hh δὲ 1 The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to indicate/show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section.
2:13 dze5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἡμεῖς & ὀφείλομεν εὐχαριστεῖν & πάντοτε 1 The word **always** is a generalization. This is used to emphasize the importance of the action. If this is not natural in your language, you could use the alternative renderings given. Alternate translation: “we should continually give thanks” or “we must thank God at all times” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2:13 m418 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς & ὀφείλομεν 1 Here, **we** refers to three men, Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy. If you have exclusive and inclusive first-person pronouns in your language, this should be an exclusive pronoun. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2:13 ia4x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀδελφοὶ ἠγαπημένοι ὑπὸ Κυρίου 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for the Lord loves you, brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:13 v15j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοὶ 1 Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. If your readers understand that it is addressed only to men, you may need to use both the masculine and the feminine forms of that word in your language. If you use a nonfigurative word such as “believers”, see that both the genders are addressed. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2:13 l7a8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀπαρχὴν εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 Being among the first people to be saved is spoken of as if the Thessalonian believers were **firstfruits**. Alternate translation: “to be among the first people who believe” or “to be some of the first people whom God was saving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:13 bpqn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀπαρχὴν εἰς σωτηρίαν ἐν ἁγιασμῷ Πνεύματος καὶ πίστει ἀληθείας 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could change the abstract nouns **salvation**, **sanctification**, **belief**, and **truth** into verbal forms. Alternate translation: “to be among the first people who believe what is true, and whom God has saved and set apart for himself by his Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:14 e0gy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **through our gospel** does not mean that the gospel belongs to Paul and his companions. It refers to the gospel about Jesus that Paul and his companions preached. Alternate translation: “through the gospel that we preached to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2:14 thmh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς περιποίησιν δόξης τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 The phrase **to the acquiring of the glory of our Lord Jesus Christ** does not mean that we will take over or divide up the glory of Jesus Christ. It means that the believers will share in Christs glory. Alternate translation: “so that you might share in the glory of our Lord Jesus Christ” or “in order that you might receive glory like our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:14 pke7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς περιποίησιν δόξης τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you can express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “so that you might become glorious like our Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:15 holv rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἄρα οὖν 1 The words **So then** connect this verse with verses 13 and 14 as their logical conclusion. Because God did the wonderful things in those verses, the Thessalonians should do what verse 15 says. Use a natural way to introduce a conclusion in your language. Alternate translation: “Therefore” or “Because God did all of that for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2:15 pa9j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **brothers** means fellow believers in Jesus, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2:15 u9ss rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor στήκετε 1 Here, the phrase **stand firm** is used to mean to not change ones beliefs but, rather, to remain steadfast in what one believes. If this would be unclear in your language, consider using an equivalent expression, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “continue to believe the truth” or “do not give up your faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:15 l4vr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κρατεῖτε τὰς παραδόσεις 1 Here, **traditions** refers to the truths about Christ that Paul and the other apostles taught. Paul speaks of them as if his readers could hold on to them with their hands. Alternate translation: “do not give up believing those truths” or “continue to believe the true teachings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:15 cpdo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet στήκετε καὶ κρατεῖτε 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize the importance of doing this. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “keep on firmly believing” or “do not allow anyone to change your mind in any way about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2:15 whp8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐδιδάχθητε 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “we have taught you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:15 z2vs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche διὰ λόγου 1 Here, **by word** is an expression that means that Paul had been present with them and taught them personally. Alternate translation: “by what we said to you in person” or “when we were talking to you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2:15 jrg4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δι’ ἐπιστολῆς ἡμῶν 1 You can make clear the implicit information that **by our letter** refers to what Paul taught to the Thessalonians in an earlier letter (probably 1 Thessalonians). Alternate translation: “by what we wrote to you in a letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:16 g8m1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2:16 njk1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing αὐτὸς δὲ ὁ Κύριος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς ὁ Πατὴρ ἡμῶν 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul ends this section with a blessing. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “Now may our Lord Jesus Christ himself, and God our Father” or “We pray that our Lord Jesus Christ himself, and God our Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
2:16 yge9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν & ἡμᾶς 1 The words **our** and **us** refer to all believers including the writers. If you have exclusive and inclusive first-person plural pronouns in your language, these should be inclusive pronouns. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2:16 cm54 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς & Κύριος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς 1 Here, **himself** gives additional emphasis to the phrase **Lord Jesus Christ**. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “our Lord Jesus Christ, the very one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2:16 h3gk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δοὺς παράκλησιν αἰωνίαν, καὶ ἐλπίδα ἀγαθὴν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **comfort** and **hope**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “always comforts us and has given us good things to hope for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:16 iirq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν χάριτι 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because of how gracious he is to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:17 x3rr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy παρακαλέσαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας, καὶ στηρίξαι 1 Here, the word **hearts** represents both the emotion and will of a person. If **hearts** does not mean this in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “may he give comfort and strength to your livers” or “may he comfort you and strengthen you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:17 yw5f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐν παντὶ ἔργῳ καὶ λόγῳ ἀγαθῷ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the phrase **work and word** with verbs. Alternative translation: “in every good thing that you do and say” or “so that you could do and say everything that is good.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3:intro b8hk 0 # 2 Thessalonians 3 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Idle and lazy persons\n\nIn Thessalonica, there apparently was a problem with people in the church who were able to work but refused to do so. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n### What should you do if your brother sins?\n\nIn this chapter, Paul teaches that Christians need to live in a way that honors God. Christians should also encourage one another and hold each other accountable for what they do. The church is also responsible for encouraging believers to repent if they sin. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
3:1 k33i rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 15, Paul asks the believers to pray for him and his companions and encourages them. A heading for this section might be, “Pray for Us.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
3:1 jy75 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases τὸ λοιπὸν 1 Here, the word **Finally** marks a change in topic. To **pray** is not the final instruction that Paul gives but it is how Paul opens the last section of his letter where he will discuss a few remaining matters. Alternate translation: “One more thing” or “So, continuing on” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
3:1 m1s5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
3:1 v8k2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 The pronoun **us** refers to Paul and his companions. If you have exclusive and inclusive first person pronouns in your language, this should be an exclusive pronoun. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3:1 r54v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τρέχῃ 1 Paul speaks of Gods **word** spreading as if it were running from place to place. He is comparing the rapid spread of Gods word to a person who takes good news to others. Alternate translation: “might spread rapidly” or “might be heard by many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:1 yvkm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ δοξάζηται 1 You can state this in active form, if the passive construction is not natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and that many people would honor it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:1 egho rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καθὼς καὶ πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “just as also happened with you” or “which is exactly what you did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
3:2 xg2h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ῥυσθῶμεν 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God may save us” or “God may rescue us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:2 h11p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἀτόπων καὶ πονηρῶν 1 The two terms **perverse** and **evil** mean basically the same thing and are used together to emphasize the amount of evil. If your language does not use repetition to do this or if you do not have two words for these attributes, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “very wicked men” or “many wicked men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
3:2 p1ct rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ γὰρ πάντων ἡ πίστις 1 The phrase **not everyone** is a negative understatement that emphasizes how rare faith is. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “for only some people believe in the Lord” or “for people who believe in Jesus are few” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
3:2 appf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “believes in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:3 yx9g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὃς στηρίξει 1 The word **strengthen** here refers to spiritual strength, not physical strength. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “who will strengthen you spiritually” or “who will make you inwardly strong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:3 p91k τοῦ πονηροῦ 1 This could mean: (1) the evil being Satan. Alternate translation: “Satan” or (2) evil in general. Alternate translation: “evil”
3:4 xk85 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πεποίθαμεν δὲ 1 The phrase **We are also confident** may be confusing in some languages. If that is the case in your language, you could translate this as a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “We also have faith” or “We also trust” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
3:4 w79e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πεποίθαμεν δὲ ἐν Κυρίῳ ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς 1 This could mean: (1) Paul has confidence in the Thessalonian believers because of the close relationship that they have with the Lord Jesus. In this case, Paul is speaking of this relationship as if they were inside the Lord Jesus. Alternative translation: “Because you are united to the Lord, we are also confident” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) (2) Paul has confidence in the Lord Jesus, that he will cause them to do what is right. Alternative translation: “Because we trust in the Lord Jesus to enable you, we are also confident”
3:5 giz4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ & Κύριος κατευθύναι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **hearts** stands for a persons thoughts or mind. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “may the Lord cause you to understand the love of God and the endurance of Christ” or “may the Lord help you to know the love of God and the endurance of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:5 wre3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Paul speaks of Gods **love** and Christs **endurance** as if they were destinations on a path. If your readers would not understand this figure of speech, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “to know how much God loves you and the endurance that Christ supplies you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:5 dzbn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **love of God** can mean (1) the love that comes from God. Alternate translation: “to know how much God loves you” or (2) the love that people give to God. Alternate translation: “to love God more” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
3:5 ia7x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **endurance of Christ** can mean (1) the endurance that Christ gives to his people. Alternate translation: “to experience the endurance that Christ gives you” or (2) the endurance that Christ had through his suffering. Alternate translation: “to know how much Christ has endured for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
3:6 mst3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 615, Paul gives the believers some final instructions about working and not being idle. A heading for this section might be, “Believers Must Work.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
3:6 v33v rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
3:6 x9l8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί & ἀδελφοῦ 1 Here, the words **brothers** and **brother** refer to fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … brother or sister” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
3:6 y4a9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **name** stands for the person of Jesus Christ. It can also mean “with the authority of.” If using this term is not clear in your language, you could express it directly. Alternate translation: “as if our Lord Jesus Christ himself were speaking” or “with the authority that our Lord Jesus Christ has given us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:6 jvw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here, **our** refers to all believers. If you have exclusive and inclusive first-person plural pronouns in your language, this should be an inclusive pronoun. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3:6 x2r8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀτάκτως περιπατοῦντος 1 Here Paul speaks of people who are not living well as if they walk in a haphazard manner. If your readers would not understand this metaphor, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “who is living in a bad way” or “who is not living correctly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:6 se1g τὴν παράδοσιν 1 Here, **the traditions** refers to the teachings that the apostles received from Jesus and are passing along to all believers. Alternate translation: “the teachings” or “the instructions”
3:7 h222 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μιμεῖσθαι ἡμᾶς 1 The phrase **to imitate** may be a difficult word to translate in your language. In that case, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “to act the way that my fellow workers and I act” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:7 b1i1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἠτακτήσαμεν ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Paul uses a double negative to emphasize the positive. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “we lived among you as those who had much discipline” or “we worked diligently when we were with you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
3:8 ruh3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἄρτον 1 Paul refers to **bread** here because it was the most common and basic food for them. If your readers would not be familiar with **bread** or if that is a kind of food that would be considered unusual or extravagant, you could use a general expression for ordinary food. Alternate translation: “food” or “anything” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3:8 d9h1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας ἐργαζόμενοι 1 Here, **night and day** forms a merism, which means “all the time.” If it would be helpful in your language to explain that they did not work without taking any rest whatsoever, then you could make the meaning clear. Alternate translation: “working throughout that time with little rest” or “we worked almost continuously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
3:8 w8fq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐν κόπῳ καὶ μόχθῳ 1 Here, **toil** and **hardship** have very similar meanings. Paul used this repetition to emphasize that they worked very hard. If you do not have two similar words that you can use here or if it would be unnatural for you to use such repetition, you could emphasize this in another way. Alternate translation: “with great effort” or “in very difficult circumstances” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
3:9 sn3k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐχ ὅτι οὐκ ἔχομεν ἐξουσίαν, ἀλλ’ 1 Paul uses a double negative to emphasize the positive. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “and we certainly have the right to receive food from you, but instead we worked for our food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
3:9 lrjr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἑαυτοὺς τύπον δῶμεν ὑμῖν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **example**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “we might show you the right way in order for you” or “we might demonstrate the way to live for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:9 z0up μιμεῖσθαι 1 See how you translated **imitate** in verse 7.
3:10 c652 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives εἴ τις οὐ θέλει ἐργάζεσθαι, μηδὲ ἐσθιέτω 1 You can state this in positive form, if this form is difficult to understand in your language. Alternate translation: “If a person wants to eat, he must work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
3:11 ey6c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τινας περιπατοῦντας & ἀτάκτως 1 Here, **walking** stands for behavior in life. you can use an equivalent metaphor from your culture, if it is available. Otherwise, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “some who are living idle lives” or “some who are being lazy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:11 iv1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἀλλὰ περιεργαζομένους 1 Meddlers are people who interfere in the affairs of others without being asked to help. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3:12 bm6z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μετὰ ἡσυχίας 1 Here, **with quietness** is the opposite of meddling. Paul exhorts the meddlers to stop getting involved in other peoples affairs. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **quietness**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in a quiet and peaceful manner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:13 jx8t rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δέ 1 Paul here uses the word **But** to contrast the lazy believers with the hardworking believers. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Concerning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
3:13 e59v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὑμεῖς 1 The word **you** refers to all the Thessalonian believers, so it should be in plural form. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
3:13 usu9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
3:14 mzs4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ ἡμῶν 1 Paul is referring to his command to the Thessalonian believers as a **word**. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “our instructions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:14 nv3v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τοῦτον σημειοῦσθε 1 Paul wants the Thessalonians to notice who this person is. Alternate translation: “point out that person” or “make sure everyone knows who he is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:14 y552 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἵνα ἐντραπῇ 1 Paul instructs believers to avoid lazy believers as a disciplinary action. If necessary, you could make this explicit to make the meaning clear. Alternate translation: “in order that he will know that his laziness is wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:15 idj6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφόν 1 Although the term **brother** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
3:16 nef4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 1618, Paul makes closing remarks to the believers at Thessalonica. A heading for this section might be, “Closing Remarks.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
3:16 z1zs rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
3:16 whb9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing αὐτὸς & ὁ Κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης, δῴη ὑμῖν 1 Paul ends the letter with blessings that are also prayers. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing or prayer in your language. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord of peace himself may give you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
3:16 zl1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς & ὁ Κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης 1 Here, **himself** emphasizes that the Lord is the source of peace and that he will personally give peace to believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
3:17 c2cb ὁ ἀσπασμὸς τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ, Παύλου, ὅ ἐστιν σημεῖον ἐν πάσῃ ἐπιστολῇ, οὕτως γράφω 1 Alternate translation: “I, Paul, write this greeting with my own hand, which I do in every letter, as a sign that this letter is truly from me because this is how I write”
3:17 e3sa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ 1 Here, the phrase **in my own hand** is an idiom meaning “in my own handwriting.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I myself am writing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:17 wg3f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὕτως γράφω 1 Paul makes it clear that this letter is from him and is not a forgery. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you could know that the letter is from me because this is how I write” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:18 h18b rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, μετὰ πάντων ὑμῶν 1 Paul ends the letter with one more blessing. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “I pray that the grace of our Lord Jesus Christ will be with you all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
1 Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
2 front:intro krd6 0 # Introduction to 2 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the book of 2 Thessalonians\n\n1. Greetings and thanksgiving (1:1–2)\n1. Believers suffer from persecution (1:3–12)\n * God uses persecution to increase faith, love, and endurance in believers (1:3–4)\n * God is just: (1:5–12)\n * God will make believers worthy of his kingdom\n * God will give relief to believers\n * God will punish those who persecute believers\n1. Some believers misunderstand about the second coming of Christ (2:1–12)\n * Christ’s return has not yet happened (2:1–2)\n * Instruction about the events that will precede the return of Christ (2:3–12)\n1. Paul’s confidence that God will save the Thessalonian believers (2:13–17)\n * Paul calls the Thessalonian believers to “stand firm” (2:13–15)\n * Paul prays that God will comfort them (2:16–17)\n1. Paul requests that the Thessalonian believers pray for him (3:1–5)\n1. Paul give commands about idle believers (3:6–15)\n1. Closing (3:16–17)\n\n### Who wrote 2 Thessalonians?\n\nPaul wrote 2 Thessalonians. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted believers. After he became a believer, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nPaul is the author of this letter, but he includes Silvanus and Timothy as senders of the letter. Paul wrote this letter while he, Silvanus, and Timothy were staying in the city of Corinth.\n\n### What is the book of 2 Thessalonians about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He encouraged the believers because they were being persecuted. He told them to continue living in a way that pleased God. He also wanted to teach them again about Christ’s return. He also warned them that they should not be idle but should work as they wait for Christ to return.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Thessalonians” or “Second Thessalonians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The Second Letter to the Christians/believers in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?\n\nPaul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation. And he will cause there to be peace everywhere. Paul also explained that a “man of lawlessness” will come before Christ’s return. This person will obey Satan and cause many people to oppose God. But Jesus will destroy this person when he returns.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?\n\nPaul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n### How are pronouns used in this letter?\n\nIn this letter, the words “we” and “us” refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. If your language differentiates between inclusive and exclusive pronouns, use an exclusive pronoun for these. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\nIn this letter, the words “you” and “your” are plural and refer to the Thessalonian believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the book of 2 Thessalonians?\n\nFor the following verses, some ancient manuscripts have a different reading than others. The ULT follows the reading that scholars consider to be the most accurate and puts the other reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in your area that your people are familiar with, consider using the reading that it follows. If not, translators are advised to follow the reading in the ULT.\n* “and the man of lawlessness is revealed” (2:3). The ULT, UST, and most modern versions read this way. Other versions follow the reading, “and the man of sin is revealed.”\n* “For God chose you as the firstfruits for salvation” (2:13) The ULT, UST, and some other versions read this way. The other reading is, “For God chose you from the first/beginning for salvation.”\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
3 1:intro m987 0 # 2 Thessalonians 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nVerses 1–2 formally introduce this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type in which the sender identified himself, then the recipient, then gave a greeting.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Paradox\n\nA paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible.\n\nA paradox occurs in verses 4–5 where Paul talks about the Thessalonian believers’ faithfulness through persecution as “evidence of the righteous judgment of God.” People would not normally think that believing in God while being persecuted is a sign of God’s righteous judgment. But the fact that God gave them the ability to persevere in their faith is evidence that God claims them as his own and will judge them as worthy of his kingdom. In verses 5–10, Paul goes on to explain more of God’s righteous judgment, that God will reward those who believe in him and that he will punish those who afflict his people. ([2 Thessalonians 1:4–5](./04.md))\n\nAnother paradox occurs in verse 9 where Paul describes the penalty for rejecting God as “eternal destruction.” Normally when something is destroyed it ceases to exist. But in this case, the people who reject God will experience eternal separation from God, as the verse goes on to explain. Being separated from God destroys all that was enjoyable about their lives, and this continuous destruction is what they experience through eternity. ([2 Thessalonians 1:9](../01/09.md))
4 1:1 hm3e rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σιλουανὸς 1 **Silvanus** is the Latin form of “Silas.” **Silvanus** is the name of a man, the same person listed in the book of Acts as Paul’s fellow traveler. If your readers may not know that these two are the same person, you could use the name “Silas” in the text and “Silvanus” in the footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
5 1:1 ge00 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος; τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 You may want to fill in the words necessary to make this a complete sentence. Alternate translation: “Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy send this letter to the church” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis)
6 1:1 l8q8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος 1 Although **Paul** wrote this letter, he identifies **Silvanus and Timothy** as also sending it. This means that they were with him and were in agreement with it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make that clear, as in the UST. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit)
7 1:1 eajo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Θεῷ Πατρὶ ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ 1 Here Paul speaks of the believers as though they were occupying space inside of God and Jesus. This metaphor expresses the idea that believers are spiritually united to God and Jesus. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “united to God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” or “sharing life with God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
8 1:2 g6rb rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Many languages have different ways to offer good wishes as they greet. Paul greeted his letter recipients with a blessing. Use a form that would be a good wish or blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “We pray that God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ give you grace and peace” or “I wish you grace and peace from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” or “May the grace and peace of God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ be your portion” or “May God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ show grace and give peace to your hearts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
9 1:2 bv9m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **Grace** and **peace**, you can express these ideas as verbs or in another way. Alternate translation: “May God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ be gracious to you and give rest to your inner being” or “...be favorable to you and make you at ease” or “...be kind to you and set your heart at rest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
10 1:3 o6v9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 3–12, Paul gives thanks for the believers in Thessalonica and prays for them. A heading for this section might be, “Thanks and Prayers.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
11 1:3 m6z5 εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν & πάντοτε 1 # General Information:\n\nPaul here uses the word **ought** to express that he has a moral obligation to God to **give thanks** for the believers in Thessalonica. Use a natural expression for this in your language. Alternate translation: “We are bound always to thank” or “We can do no other than to thank” or “We must give thanks continually to”
12 1:3 ea59 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε 1 Paul uses **always** as a generalization meaning “often” or “regularly.” Alternate translation: “We should often give thanks to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
13 1:3 o01t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε περὶ ὑμῶν, ἀδελφοί 1 If your readers might think that Paul is expressing an obligation only and that he does not actually pray for the Thessalonians, you could express the reality explicitly. Alternate translation: “We always thank God for you, brothers, as we ought” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
14 1:3 h6t9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. If your readers understand that it is addressed only to men, you may need to use both the masculine and the feminine forms of that word in your language. If you use a nonfigurative word such as “believers”, see that both the genders are addressed. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
15 1:3 ezaf rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καθὼς ἄξιόν ἐστιν 1 If it is difficult to express **just as it is fitting** in your language or if it is unclear what **it** refers to, consider starting a new sentence here to state it clearly. Alternate translation: “When we give thanks for you we are doing the right thing” or “Giving thanks for you is right for us to be doing” or “ & is the right thing to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
16 1:3 emu9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὑπεραυξάνει ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you can express this idea as a verb. Alternate translation: “you believe in Christ more and more” or “you increasingly trust in Christ” or “you rely on Christ more each day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
17 1:3 xy7k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πλεονάζει ἡ ἀγάπη ἑνὸς ἑκάστου, πάντων ὑμῶν, εἰς ἀλλήλους 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you can express this idea as a verb. Alternate translation: “each of you sincerely loves one another more and more” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
18 1:3 bmn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ἀλλήλους 1 Here, **one another** means fellow believers. Alternate translation: “each other” or “each believer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
19 1:4 kx1n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτοὺς ἡμᾶς 1 Here, **ourselves** is added to **we** to emphasize that even the apostle Paul and his associates are boasting about the Thessalonian believers. Alternate translation: “even we” or “we are the ones who” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns)
20 1:4 gcth rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς ὑπομονῆς ὑμῶν, καὶ πίστεως 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **endurance** and **faith** or if it is unclear how these two terms relate, you can express these same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how you patiently continue to trust in Jesus” or “how you persevere in believing in the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
21 1:4 qlo9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς διωγμοῖς ὑμῶν, καὶ ταῖς θλίψεσιν 1 The two words **persecutions** and **afflictions** are saying very similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize how difficult life has been for the Thessalonian believers. If two words are difficult to find in your language or if your language does not use repetition in this way, you can use one word with this meaning and make the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “as you have been going through all these very difficult times” or “as people make you suffer in all the ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
22 1:4 md0d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πίστεως ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς διωγμοῖς ὑμῶν 1 Here, **faith in all your persecutions** does not mean to believe in or trust in persecutions. If your readers might be confused by that, you could express it more clearly. Alternate translation: “faith in Jesus Christ during all the times you are persecuted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
23 1:5 rs3b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔνδειγμα τῆς δικαίας κρίσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰς τὸ καταξιωθῆναι ὑμᾶς 1 The **evidence** that Paul is referring to here is the faithful endurance of the Thessalonian believers while suffering persecution, which he mentioned in verse 4. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. It may also be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Your endurance while suffering is a clear indication of God’s righteous judgment, that he considers you worthy” or “Your faithfulness through persecution shows that God is just and right to consider you worthy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
24 1:5 dad9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰς τὸ καταξιωθῆναι ὑμᾶς τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that God will consider you worthy to be part of his kingdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
25 1:5 xm2g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑπὲρ ἧς καὶ πάσχετε 1 Here, **also** could mean: (1) the Thessalonian believers are suffering for the kingdom of God as well as being counted worthy of it. Alternate translation: “being a part of which is also the reason that you are suffering” (2) the Thessalonian believers are suffering along with other believers. Alternate translation: “which is why you are going through sufferings along with many others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
26 1:6 cxx1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴπερ δίκαιον παρὰ Θεῷ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you know that God is just” or “for God is certainly right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
27 1:6 id3i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor παρὰ Θεῷ, ἀνταποδοῦναι τοῖς θλίβουσιν ὑμᾶς θλῖψιν 1 Here, **to return** means to cause someone to experience the same thing that they did to someone else as though the same action were bouncing back onto the people who did that action. Use a natural expression for this kind of reciprocal action. Alternate translation: “for God to afflict those who are afflicting you” or “for God to pay back those who are afflicting you” “for God to do the same to those who are afflicting you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
28 1:6 zemk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀνταποδοῦναι τοῖς θλίβουσιν ὑμᾶς θλῖψιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **affliction**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to afflict those who are afflicting you” or “to trouble those who are troubling you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
29 1:7 hxy2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ ὑμῖν & ἄνεσιν 1 The words **and relief to you** continue the description of what God is right “to return” to people (verse 6). If this would not be understood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and it is righteous for God to give relief to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
30 1:7 l3ht rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καὶ ὑμῖν τοῖς θλιβομένοις, ἄνεσιν μεθ’ ἡμῶν 1 Here, **you who are being afflicted** refers to the Thessalonian believers, and **us** refers to Paul and his associates. Other people are afflicting both groups because of their faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “and relief to you who are being afflicted just as we are being afflicted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
31 1:7 knbb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὑμῖν & ἄνεσιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **relief**, you can express this idea with a verb or in another way. Alternate translation: “to relieve you” or “to rescue you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
32 1:7 bcxy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῖς θλιβομένοις 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom other people are afflicting” or “from the affliction that others are causing you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
33 1:7 fh5g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῇ ἀποκαλύψει τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, **at the revealing** is an indication of the time when the suffering believers will have relief from their suffering. Alternate translation: “at the time when the Lord Jesus is revealed” or “when everyone sees the Lord Jesus coming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
34 1:8 p1ie rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διδόντος ἐκδίκησιν τοῖς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **vengeance**, you can express this idea in another way. Since this is part of God’s justice, do not use a word that implies that God is doing something illegal or inappropriate. Alternate translation: “punishing the people” or “judging the ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
35 1:8 ynt4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῖς μὴ εἰδόσι Θεὸν 1 Here, **the ones not having known God** refers to those who have refused the relationship with God that he had offered to them. Alternate translation: “on those who did not want to know God” or “on those who have rejected God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
36 1:8 gv0v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ τοῖς μὴ ὑπακούουσιν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1 The phrase, **not obeying the gospel** could refer to: (1) the same people as **those not having known God**. Alternate translation: “and who are not obeying the gospel” (2) a separate group. Alternate translation: “and also on those who are not obeying the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
37 1:8 m37v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὑπακούουσιν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1 The phrase, **obeying the gospel** is an idiom that means to live according to everything that God tells us in the gospel message. Alternate translation: “living according to the message of the gospel” or “heeding the admonitions that are part of the gospel message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
38 1:8 dkkx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the general possessive form **of our Lord Jesus** to describe **the gospel**. The specific meaning here is that the gospel is about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the gospel that is about our Lord Jesus” or “the gospel message that tells us about our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
39 1:9 plw5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἵτινες δίκην τίσουσιν 1 Here, **who** refers to the people who are not obeying the gospel, not to the Lord Jesus. You may prefer to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Those people will pay the penalty” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
40 1:9 peog rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οἵτινες δίκην τίσουσιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of the word **penalty**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who will be punished by God” or “whom God will punish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
41 1:9 ebf1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom δίκην τίσουσιν 1 Here, the phrase **pay the penalty** is an idiom meaning to suffer the consequences of doing something bad. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “will suffer the consequences” or “will undergo the retribution” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
42 1:9 yruv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὄλεθρον αἰώνιον 1 Here, **eternal destruction** further describes the **penalty** that people will experience if they refuse to “obey the gospel.” The **destruction** that these people will experience is **eternal**, that is, it never ends. Therefore, do not translate with the meaning that these people will cease to exist. They will continue to exist, but continually experience the ruin of their lives. If necessary, put this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “God will punish them eternally” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
43 1:9 qhta rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Here, **the face of the Lord** is an idiom meaning the presence of the Lord. Alternate translation: “away from our Lord Jesus” or “separated from the presence of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
44 1:9 htqg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῆς δόξης τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ 1 Here, the possessive form is describing **power** that has **glory**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “glorious” to describe the **power**. Alternate translation: “his glorious power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
45 1:9 wmdm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς δόξης τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **glory** and **power**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “experiencing how magnificent and powerful he is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
46 1:10 ugk9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅταν ἔλθῃ & ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ 1 Here, **that day** is the day when Jesus will return to the world. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the day when Jesus returns to the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
47 1:10 bi2u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐνδοξασθῆναι ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις αὐτοῦ, καὶ θαυμασθῆναι ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς πιστεύσασιν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as his saints glorify him and all those who have believed marvel at him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
48 1:10 wsvb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἐνδοξασθῆναι ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις αὐτοῦ, καὶ θαυμασθῆναι 1 Here, the two verbs **to be glorified**and **to be marveled at** indicate the result of Jesus’ coming, not the purpose. Use a connector here that indicates result. Alternate translation: “as his saints glorify him and all those who have believed marvel at him” or “with the result that his saints will glorify him and all those who have believed will marvel at him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
49 1:10 z1hg ἐνδοξασθῆναι ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις αὐτοῦ, καὶ θαυμασθῆναι ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς πιστεύσασιν 1 The **saints** and **the ones having believed** are one group of people, not two. If your readers might be confused by this, you could combine these into one phrase. Alternate translation: “with the result that all of his saints, that is, the believers, will glorify him and marvel at him” or “as all of his people glorify him and marvel at him”
50 1:10 e56p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπιστεύθη τὸ μαρτύριον ἡμῶν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you have believed our witness when we shared it with you” or “when we testified about the saving power of Jesus Christ, you believed what we said” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive)
51 1:11 zy14 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς ὃ 1 Here, **For this** connects verse 11 to verse 10, so that verse 11 gives the means or method (prayer for the Thessalonian believers) for reaching the purpose that verse 10 has just described (for Jesus to “be glorified & and marveled at”). Use a natural way in your language for introducing this relationship. Alternate translation: “This is why” or “To this end” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
52 1:11 ik19 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole καὶ προσευχόμεθα πάντοτε περὶ ὑμῶν 1 Paul is using **always** as an exaggeration in order to emphasize how often he prays for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “we also pray regularly for you” or “we continue to pray for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
53 1:11 hiv9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς κλήσεως 1 Here, **calling** refers to God appointing or choosing people to belong to him and to proclaim his message of salvation through Jesus. Alternate translation: “to appoint you to belong to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
54 1:11 r8gk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πληρώσῃ πᾶσαν εὐδοκίαν ἀγαθωσύνης, καὶ ἔργον πίστεως ἐν δυνάμει 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **desire**, **goodness**, **faith**, and **power**, you can express these ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “he may make you able to do all of the good things that you want to do because you trust in Jesus and because God is powerful” or “he may empower you to act on what you believe in order to do good things in every way that you desire, because God is powerful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
55 1:11 c7o6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ πληρώσῃ 1 Here, **and he may fulfill** adds another reason why Paul and his associates **pray always** for the Thessalonian believers. This part of the sentence assumes some of the words from earlier in the sentence. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the earlier part of the sentence. Alternate translation: “and we also pray so that he may fulfill” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
56 1:12 nvth rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ὅπως 1 Here, **so that** introduces the purpose for which Paul and his associates pray all of the things mentioned in verse 11. It is a repetition of the same purpose that was given in verse 10, using similar words. Alternate translation: “and we also pray so that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
57 1:12 c6ec rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, **the name of our Lord Jesus** stands for the person of the Lord Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the reputation of our Lord Jesus” or “our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
58 1:12 q994 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὅπως ἐνδοξασθῇ τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ, ἐν ὑμῖν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. This could mean: (1) the Thessalonian believers will glorify Jesus. Alternate translation: “so that you would glorify the name of our Lord Jesus” (2) others will glorify Jesus because of what he has done for the Thessalonian believers. Alternate translation: “so that people would glorify the name of our Lord Jesus because of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
59 1:12 pg2i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν αὐτῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and Jesus might glorify you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
60 1:12 l4l1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν αὐτῷ 1 The phrase **and you in him** leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could make a complete sentence by supplying these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and so that you might be glorified in him” or “and so that he might glorify you” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis)
61 1:12 z8k9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κατὰ τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to how exceedingly kind our God and the Lord Jesus Christ are to you” or “as our God and the Lord Jesus Christ continue to abundantly bless you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
62 1:12 z1my τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 The phrase translated as **our God and the Lord Jesus Christ** could refer to: (1) two persons of the Trinity, God the Father and Jesus the Son. (2) one person, Jesus, who is both God and Lord. Alternate translation: “of our God and Lord, Jesus Christ”
63 2:intro jq9r 0 # 2 Thessalonians 2 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Man of lawlessness\n\nThis person is also called “the son of destruction” and “the lawless one” in this chapter. He is not Satan, but he is empowered by Satan and is the leader of those who do Satan’s evil work in the world in the last days. He is certainly one of the “antichrists” mentioned by John (1 John 2:18) and may be the final one, described as a beast in Revelation 13. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]])\n\n### Sits in the temple of God\n\nPaul could be referring to the Jerusalem temple that the Romans destroyed several years after he wrote this letter. Or he could be referring to a future physical temple, or to the church as the spiritual temple of God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
64 2:1 r36t rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 1–12, Paul exhorts believers not to be deceived about the day Jesus will come back and warns them about the coming man of lawlessness. A heading for this section might be, “The Man of Lawlessness” or “The Deception before Jesus Returns.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
65 2:1 q1uq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
66 2:1 uy4z rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ὑπὲρ τῆς παρουσίας τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἡμῶν ἐπισυναγωγῆς ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 The **coming of our Lord Jesus Christ** and **our gathering to him** are two actions that happen at the same time. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “regarding the time of our Lord Jesus coming when we will be gathered together unto him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
67 2:1 sx2f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὑπὲρ τῆς παρουσίας τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἡμῶν ἐπισυναγωγῆς ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 If it is more natural in your language, you could use active verbs for the events of **coming** and **gathering**. Alternate translation: “about the time when our Lord Jesus will come and gather us to himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
68 2:1 cvg5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
69 2:2 b8b2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives εἰς τὸ μὴ ταχέως σαλευθῆναι ὑμᾶς ἀπὸ τοῦ νοὸς 1 The phrase **shaken in your mind** refers to a person’s thoughts being unsettled. You could also express this positively. Alternate translation: “for you to remain firm in your thinking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
70 2:2 fj52 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μηδὲ θροεῖσθαι 1 The phrase **to be troubled** refers to a person’s emotions being unsettled. You could also express this positively. Alternate translation: “and remain peaceful when a message comes” or “and keep calm when you hear something” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
71 2:2 d334 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis μήτε διὰ πνεύματος, μήτε διὰ λόγου, μήτε δι’ ἐπιστολῆς, ὡς δι’ ἡμῶν 1 Paul is leaving out some words here that might be necessary in your language. If it is helpful, you could supply these words. Alternate translation: “when you receive a message either by means of a spirit or by means of a spoken word or by means of a written letter that pretends to be coming from us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
72 2:2 ll80 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὡς δι’ ἡμῶν 1 Paul is leaving out some words here that might be necessary in your language. If it is helpful, you could supply these words. Alternate translation: “that claims to have come from us” or “trying to deceive you that it is from us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
73 2:2 k4dk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὡς ὅτι 1 Paul is leaving out some words here that might be necessary in your language. If it is helpful, you could supply these words. Alternate translation: “that talks as if” or “that falsely claims that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
74 2:2 ib6m ἡ ἡμέρα τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Here, **the day of the Lord** refers to the time when Jesus will come back to the earth for all believers.
75 2:3 l9c5 μή τις ὑμᾶς ἐξαπατήσῃ κατὰ μηδένα τρόπον 1 # General Information:\n\nAlternate translation: “Do not permit anyone to fool you” or “Do not believe at all the wrong words that people are telling you about this”
76 2:3 ej66 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὅτι ἐὰν μὴ ἔλθῃ ἡ ἀποστασία πρῶτον 1 Here, Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “for the day of the Lord will not come unless the apostacy comes first” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
77 2:3 y7ch rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἀποστασία 1 Here, **the apostacy** refers to a future time when many people will turn away from God. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express it in another way. Alternate translation: “the time when many people will rebel against God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
78 2:3 e86v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀποκαλυφθῇ ὁ ἄνθρωπος τῆς ἀνομίας 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the man of lawlessness arrives” or “the man of lawlessness makes himself known” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
79 2:3 jsyj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὁ ἄνθρωπος τῆς ἀνομίας 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **man** who is characterized by **lawlessness**. By this Paul means that this man will oppose all of God’s commandments and instructions. If this is not clear in your language, you could express this another way. Alternate translation: “the lawless man” or “the man who opposes God’s rule” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
80 2:3 tkg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας 1 Here, **son of destruction** is an idiom meaning a person who is destined for destruction. Alternate translation: “the one who will be destroyed” or “the one whom God will destroy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
81 2:3 x6p0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας 1 God will destroy this person some time after the events of verse 4. If it would be clearer in your language, consider moving this phrase to the end of verse 4. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
82 2:4 t485 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πάντα λεγόμενον θεὸν ἢ σέβασμα 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “everything that people call God or whatever they worship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
83 2:4 sk8t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture αὐτὸν & καθίσαι 1 Here, **he himself sits** is part of a description of the kinds of things that this person does. If it is confusing in your language to use the present tense for this, you could use the future tense, since this will happen in the future. Alternate translation: “he himself will sit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
84 2:4 wj33 ἀποδεικνύντα ἑαυτὸν ὅτι ἔστιν Θεός 1 Here, **showing that he himself is God** does not mean that this man is God, but only that he is displaying himself to the world as though he were God. Alternate translation: “showing himself as God” or “attempting to demonstrate to people that he himself is God”
85 2:5 rsz1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐ μνημονεύετε ὅτι, ἔτι ὢν πρὸς ὑμᾶς, ταῦτα ἔλεγον ὑμῖν 1 Paul is not asking for information here, but is using the question form to remind the Thessalonians of what he taught when he was with them previously. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
86 2:5 lkk7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 Here, **these things** refers to the topics that Paul mentioned in verses 3 and 4, including the rebellion against God, the man of lawlessness, and the return of Jesus on the day of the Lord. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
87 2:6 hph0 καὶ νῦν τὸ κατέχον οἴδατε 1 There are two possibilities for understanding the function of the word **now** here. (1) It goes with **the one restraining {him}**. Alternate translation: “And you know what is restraining him now” or (2) it goes with **you know**. Alternate translation: “And now you know what is restraining him”
88 2:6 ask4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ ἀποκαλυφθῆναι αὐτὸν ἐν τῷ αὐτοῦ καιρῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the proper time, when God will allow him to reveal himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
89 2:7 faa5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast γὰρ 1 Here, the word translated **For** serves to connect this sentence as a contrast to what Paul has said about **lawlessness**, starting in verse 3. Until here, Paul was talking about lawlessness in the future, but now he wants to clarify that people are already being lawless.Use a natural way in your language for introducing this contrast. Alternate translation: “Now” or “Actually,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
90 2:7 si9i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ & μυστήριον ἤδη ἐνεργεῖται τῆς ἀνομίας 1 Here, **lawlessness** is characterized as a **mystery** because we cannot understand why people rebel against God’s wise instructions unless we understand the spiritual forces at work, which Paul explains here. If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you can express them in another way. Alternate translation: “people are already mysteriously rebelling against God” or “Satan is already secretly leading people to reject God’s laws, as this man will do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
91 2:7 fcu7 ὁ κατέχων 1 To restrain someone is to hold him back or to keep him from doing what he wants to do. Alternate translation: “the one who has been holding him back”
92 2:7 bijc rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns γένηται 1 Here, **he** refers to the one who is restraining the man of lawlessness. If this is not clear to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who restrains the man of lawlessness moves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
93 2:7 tt88 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκ μέσου γένηται 1 Here Paul speaks of the person who is restraining the man of lawlessness as though he were standing in front of him and blocking his path. If this does not make sense in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor or you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “he stops restraining him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
94 2:8 hn67 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ τότε ἀποκαλυφθήσεται ὁ ἄνομος 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and then God will allow the lawless one to show himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
95 2:8 vay9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 In this figure of speech, **breath** represents the power of God and **mouth** represents the spoken word of Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “by the power of his spoken word” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
96 2:8 hy3y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἀνελεῖ τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ, καὶ καταργήσει τῇ ἐπιφανείᾳ τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ 1 These two phrases describe the same event. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize how much more powerful Jesus is than the man of lawlessness. If it is confusing for your readers to talk about killing someone and then bringing him to nothing, you could reverse the order of the phrases, as in the UST, or you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “will destroy by his glorious appearance and with the breath of his mouth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
97 2:9 sp9v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession οὗ ἐστιν ἡ παρουσία, κατ’ ἐνέργειαν τοῦ Σατανᾶ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **work** that **Satan** does. If this is not clear in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Satan will bring this man and will work through him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
98 2:9 rikg οὗ 1 Here, **whom** refers back to the man of lawlessness. Alternate translation: “of the man of lawlessness”
99 2:9 bd5m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐν πάσῃ δυνάμει, καὶ σημείοις, καὶ τέρασιν ψεύδους 1 Here, **all** is hyperbole. It can apply to: (1) only **power**, with the meaning “much” or “great.” Alternate translation: “with great power to do signs and false wonders” or (2) **power**, **signs**, and **wonders**, with the meaning “many kinds of.” Alternate translation: “with many kinds of power, signs, and false wonders” or (3) a combination of the two. Alternate translation: “with much power to do all kinds of signs and false wonders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
100 2:9 kcaw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν πάσῃ δυνάμει, καὶ σημείοις, καὶ τέρασιν ψεύδους 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **power**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “with very powerful signs and false wonders” or “who made him very powerful to do signs and false wonders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
101 2:9 fjfn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet καὶ σημείοις, καὶ τέρασιν ψεύδους 1 The words **signs** and **wonders** often occur together and mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how amazing they are. If your language does not have two words for this or does not use repetition to do this, you can use one word and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “and amazing false miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
102 2:10 tf75 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάσῃ 1 Here, **all** is hyperbole and could mean: (1) “a high degree of” or (2) “many kinds of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
103 2:10 ippb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐν πάσῃ ἀπάτῃ ἀδικίας 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **deceit** that results from **unrighteousness**. If the relationship of the words is not clear in your language, you could express it more explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he is so unrighteous, he will be very deceptive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
104 2:10 b55e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν πάσῃ ἀπάτῃ ἀδικίας, τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **deceit** and **unrighteousness**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “because he is so unrighteous, he will completely deceive those who are perishing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
105 2:10 e8hi rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἀνθ’ ὧν 1 What follows this phrase is the reason that the people are perishing. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason. You may want to start a new sentence here and end what came before it with a period. Alternate translation: “They are perishing because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
106 2:10 rtua rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀγάπην τῆς ἀληθείας οὐκ ἐδέξαντο 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **love** and **truth**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Also, your language might prefer an expression other than **love** for something as impersonal as **truth**. Alternate translation: “they did not want to consider the true message about Jesus to be important” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
107 2:10 sl5b rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς τὸ σωθῆναι αὐτούς 1 This phrase could express: (1) the result of receiving the love of the truth. Alternate translation: “and thus be saved” or (2) the purpose of loving the truth. Alternate translation: “so that they could be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
108 2:10 xst1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰς τὸ σωθῆναι αὐτούς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, that would be God. Alternate translation: “for God to save them” or “so that God would save them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
109 2:11 sj1v rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ τοῦτο 1 What follows **because of this** is the result of the action of the people who “did not receive the love of the truth” in verse 10. Use a connector that shows that what the people did in verse 10 is the reason for what follows in this verse. Alternate translation: “for this reason” or “because the people did not receive the love of the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
110 2:11 en8e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πέμπει αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς ἐνέργειαν πλάνης, εἰς τὸ πιστεῦσαι αὐτοὺς τῷ ψεύδει 1 Paul is speaking of **God** allowing something to happen to people as if he is **sending** something to them. Alternate translation: “God is allowing them to think wrongly so that they believe the lies of the man of lawlessness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
111 2:11 u7a0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐνέργειαν πλάνης 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **working** that is characterized by **error**. This means something that works to produce error in them. Alternate translation: “the ability to think in a wrong way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
112 2:11 nass rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς τὸ πιστεῦσαι αὐτοὺς 1 Here, **for** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God sends the **working of error**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “so that they may believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
113 2:11 bkpm rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns εἰς τὸ πιστεῦσαι αὐτοὺς 1 Here, **them** refers to the people who “did not receive the love of the truth” in verse 10. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that these people may believe” or “in order that the people who did not receive the love of the truth may believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
114 2:12 x33k rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 This phrase introduces a purpose clause. This follows the purpose clause of verse 11, so you may want to link them together. Alternate translation: “and furthermore, so that” or “and therefore” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
115 2:12 d63e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κριθῶσιν πάντες 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, that would be God. Alternate translation: “God may judge all of them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
116 2:12 pkw8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἱ 1 Here, **the ones** refers back to the people that Paul has described with similar terms in verse 10. These are the same people who “did not receive the love of the truth” and instead accepted the “deceit of unrighteousness.” You may want to start a new sentence here and end what came before with a period. Alternate translation: “Those are the people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
117 2:12 m1cl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οἱ μὴ πιστεύσαντες τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, ἀλλὰ εὐδοκήσαντες τῇ ἀδικίᾳ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **truth** and **unrighteousness**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “those who have not believed the true message but have enjoyed doing sinful things” or “those people who have rejected the true message about the Lord and instead have chosen to do what is wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
118 2:13 w83a rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul now changes topics. If you are using section headings, you could put one here before verse 13. Suggested heading: “Paul gives thanks to God for the believers and encourages them.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
119 2:13 b3hh δὲ 1 The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to indicate/show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section.
120 2:13 dze5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἡμεῖς & ὀφείλομεν εὐχαριστεῖν & πάντοτε 1 The word **always** is a generalization. This is used to emphasize the importance of the action. If this is not natural in your language, you could use the alternative renderings given. Alternate translation: “we should continually give thanks” or “we must thank God at all times” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
121 2:13 m418 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς & ὀφείλομεν 1 Here, **we** refers to three men, Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy. If you have exclusive and inclusive first-person pronouns in your language, this should be an exclusive pronoun. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
122 2:13 ia4x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀδελφοὶ ἠγαπημένοι ὑπὸ Κυρίου 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for the Lord loves you, brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
123 2:13 v15j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοὶ 1 Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. If your readers understand that it is addressed only to men, you may need to use both the masculine and the feminine forms of that word in your language. If you use a nonfigurative word such as “believers”, see that both the genders are addressed. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
124 2:13 l7a8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀπαρχὴν εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 Being among the first people to be saved is spoken of as if the Thessalonian believers were **firstfruits**. Alternate translation: “to be among the first people who believe” or “to be some of the first people whom God was saving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
125 2:13 bpqn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀπαρχὴν εἰς σωτηρίαν ἐν ἁγιασμῷ Πνεύματος καὶ πίστει ἀληθείας 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could change the abstract nouns **salvation**, **sanctification**, **belief**, and **truth** into verbal forms. Alternate translation: “to be among the first people who believe what is true, and whom God has saved and set apart for himself by his Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
126 2:14 e0gy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **through our gospel** does not mean that the gospel belongs to Paul and his companions. It refers to the gospel about Jesus that Paul and his companions preached. Alternate translation: “through the gospel that we preached to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
127 2:14 thmh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς περιποίησιν δόξης τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 The phrase **to the acquiring of the glory of our Lord Jesus Christ** does not mean that we will take over or divide up the glory of Jesus Christ. It means that the believers will share in Christ’s glory. Alternate translation: “so that you might share in the glory of our Lord Jesus Christ” or “in order that you might receive glory like our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
128 2:14 pke7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς περιποίησιν δόξης τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you can express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “so that you might become glorious like our Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
129 2:15 holv rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἄρα οὖν 1 The words **So then** connect this verse with verses 13 and 14 as their logical conclusion. Because God did the wonderful things in those verses, the Thessalonians should do what verse 15 says. Use a natural way to introduce a conclusion in your language. Alternate translation: “Therefore” or “Because God did all of that for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
130 2:15 pa9j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **brothers** means fellow believers in Jesus, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
131 2:15 u9ss rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor στήκετε 1 Here, the phrase **stand firm** is used to mean to not change one’s beliefs but, rather, to remain steadfast in what one believes. If this would be unclear in your language, consider using an equivalent expression, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “continue to believe the truth” or “do not give up your faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
132 2:15 l4vr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κρατεῖτε τὰς παραδόσεις 1 Here, **traditions** refers to the truths about Christ that Paul and the other apostles taught. Paul speaks of them as if his readers could hold on to them with their hands. Alternate translation: “do not give up believing those truths” or “continue to believe the true teachings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
133 2:15 cpdo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet στήκετε καὶ κρατεῖτε 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize the importance of doing this. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “keep on firmly believing” or “do not allow anyone to change your mind in any way about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
134 2:15 whp8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐδιδάχθητε 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “we have taught you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
135 2:15 z2vs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche διὰ λόγου 1 Here, **by word** is an expression that means that Paul had been present with them and taught them personally. Alternate translation: “by what we said to you in person” or “when we were talking to you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
136 2:15 jrg4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δι’ ἐπιστολῆς ἡμῶν 1 You can make clear the implicit information that **by our letter** refers to what Paul taught to the Thessalonians in an earlier letter (probably 1 Thessalonians). Alternate translation: “by what we wrote to you in a letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
137 2:16 g8m1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
138 2:16 njk1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing αὐτὸς δὲ ὁ Κύριος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς ὁ Πατὴρ ἡμῶν 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul ends this section with a blessing. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “Now may our Lord Jesus Christ himself, and God our Father” or “We pray that our Lord Jesus Christ himself, and God our Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
139 2:16 yge9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν & ἡμᾶς 1 The words **our** and **us** refer to all believers including the writers. If you have exclusive and inclusive first-person plural pronouns in your language, these should be inclusive pronouns. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
140 2:16 cm54 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς & Κύριος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς 1 Here, **himself** gives additional emphasis to the phrase **Lord Jesus Christ**. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “our Lord Jesus Christ, the very one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
141 2:16 h3gk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δοὺς παράκλησιν αἰωνίαν, καὶ ἐλπίδα ἀγαθὴν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **comfort** and **hope**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “always comforts us and has given us good things to hope for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
142 2:16 iirq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν χάριτι 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because of how gracious he is to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
143 2:17 x3rr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy παρακαλέσαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας, καὶ στηρίξαι 1 Here, the word **hearts** represents both the emotion and will of a person. If **hearts** does not mean this in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “may he give comfort and strength to your livers” or “may he comfort you and strengthen you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
144 2:17 yw5f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐν παντὶ ἔργῳ καὶ λόγῳ ἀγαθῷ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the phrase **work and word** with verbs. Alternative translation: “in every good thing that you do and say” or “so that you could do and say everything that is good.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
145 3:intro b8hk 0 # 2 Thessalonians 3 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Idle and lazy persons\n\nIn Thessalonica, there apparently was a problem with people in the church who were able to work but refused to do so. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n### What should you do if your brother sins?\n\nIn this chapter, Paul teaches that Christians need to live in a way that honors God. Christians should also encourage one another and hold each other accountable for what they do. The church is also responsible for encouraging believers to repent if they sin. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
146 3:1 k33i rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 1–5, Paul asks the believers to pray for him and his companions and encourages them. A heading for this section might be, “Pray for Us.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
147 3:1 jy75 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases τὸ λοιπὸν 1 Here, the word **Finally** marks a change in topic. To **pray** is not the final instruction that Paul gives but it is how Paul opens the last section of his letter where he will discuss a few remaining matters. Alternate translation: “One more thing” or “So, continuing on” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
148 3:1 m1s5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
149 3:1 v8k2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 The pronoun **us** refers to Paul and his companions. If you have exclusive and inclusive first person pronouns in your language, this should be an exclusive pronoun. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
150 3:1 r54v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τρέχῃ 1 Paul speaks of God’s **word** spreading as if it were running from place to place. He is comparing the rapid spread of God’s word to a person who takes good news to others. Alternate translation: “might spread rapidly” or “might be heard by many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
151 3:1 yvkm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ δοξάζηται 1 You can state this in active form, if the passive construction is not natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and that many people would honor it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
152 3:1 egho rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καθὼς καὶ πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “just as also happened with you” or “which is exactly what you did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
153 3:2 xg2h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ῥυσθῶμεν 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God may save us” or “God may rescue us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
154 3:2 h11p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἀτόπων καὶ πονηρῶν 1 The two terms **perverse** and **evil** mean basically the same thing and are used together to emphasize the amount of evil. If your language does not use repetition to do this or if you do not have two words for these attributes, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “very wicked men” or “many wicked men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
155 3:2 p1ct rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ γὰρ πάντων ἡ πίστις 1 The phrase **not everyone** is a negative understatement that emphasizes how rare faith is. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “for only some people believe in the Lord” or “for people who believe in Jesus are few” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
156 3:2 appf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “believes in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
157 3:3 yx9g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὃς στηρίξει 1 The word **strengthen** here refers to spiritual strength, not physical strength. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “who will strengthen you spiritually” or “who will make you inwardly strong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
158 3:3 p91k τοῦ πονηροῦ 1 This could mean: (1) the evil being Satan. Alternate translation: “Satan” or (2) evil in general. Alternate translation: “evil”
159 3:4 xk85 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πεποίθαμεν δὲ 1 The phrase **We are also confident** may be confusing in some languages. If that is the case in your language, you could translate this as a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “We also have faith” or “We also trust” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
160 3:4 w79e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πεποίθαμεν δὲ ἐν Κυρίῳ ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς 1 This could mean: (1) Paul has confidence in the Thessalonian believers because of the close relationship that they have with the Lord Jesus. In this case, Paul is speaking of this relationship as if they were inside the Lord Jesus. Alternative translation: “Because you are united to the Lord, we are also confident” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) (2) Paul has confidence in the Lord Jesus, that he will cause them to do what is right. Alternative translation: “Because we trust in the Lord Jesus to enable you, we are also confident”
161 3:5 giz4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ & Κύριος κατευθύναι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **hearts** stands for a person’s thoughts or mind. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “may the Lord cause you to understand the love of God and the endurance of Christ” or “may the Lord help you to know the love of God and the endurance of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
162 3:5 wre3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Paul speaks of God’s **love** and Christ’s **endurance** as if they were destinations on a path. If your readers would not understand this figure of speech, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “to know how much God loves you and the endurance that Christ supplies you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
163 3:5 dzbn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **love of God** can mean (1) the love that comes from God. Alternate translation: “to know how much God loves you” or (2) the love that people give to God. Alternate translation: “to love God more” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
164 3:5 ia7x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **endurance of Christ** can mean (1) the endurance that Christ gives to his people. Alternate translation: “to experience the endurance that Christ gives you” or (2) the endurance that Christ had through his suffering. Alternate translation: “to know how much Christ has endured for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
165 3:6 mst3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 6–15, Paul gives the believers some final instructions about working and not being idle. A heading for this section might be, “Believers Must Work.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
166 3:6 v33v rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
167 3:6 x9l8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί & ἀδελφοῦ 1 Here, the words **brothers** and **brother** refer to fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … brother or sister” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
168 3:6 y4a9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **name** stands for the person of Jesus Christ. It can also mean “with the authority of.” If using this term is not clear in your language, you could express it directly. Alternate translation: “as if our Lord Jesus Christ himself were speaking” or “with the authority that our Lord Jesus Christ has given us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
169 3:6 jvw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here, **our** refers to all believers. If you have exclusive and inclusive first-person plural pronouns in your language, this should be an inclusive pronoun. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
170 3:6 x2r8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀτάκτως περιπατοῦντος 1 Here Paul speaks of people who are not living well as if they walk in a haphazard manner. If your readers would not understand this metaphor, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “who is living in a bad way” or “who is not living correctly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
171 3:6 se1g τὴν παράδοσιν 1 Here, **the traditions** refers to the teachings that the apostles received from Jesus and are passing along to all believers. Alternate translation: “the teachings” or “the instructions”
172 3:7 h222 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μιμεῖσθαι ἡμᾶς 1 The phrase **to imitate** may be a difficult word to translate in your language. In that case, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “to act the way that my fellow workers and I act” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
173 3:7 b1i1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἠτακτήσαμεν ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Paul uses a double negative to emphasize the positive. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “we lived among you as those who had much discipline” or “we worked diligently when we were with you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
174 3:8 ruh3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἄρτον 1 Paul refers to **bread** here because it was the most common and basic food for them. If your readers would not be familiar with **bread** or if that is a kind of food that would be considered unusual or extravagant, you could use a general expression for ordinary food. Alternate translation: “food” or “anything” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
175 3:8 d9h1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας ἐργαζόμενοι 1 Here, **night and day** forms a merism, which means “all the time.” If it would be helpful in your language to explain that they did not work without taking any rest whatsoever, then you could make the meaning clear. Alternate translation: “working throughout that time with little rest” or “we worked almost continuously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
176 3:8 w8fq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐν κόπῳ καὶ μόχθῳ 1 Here, **toil** and **hardship** have very similar meanings. Paul used this repetition to emphasize that they worked very hard. If you do not have two similar words that you can use here or if it would be unnatural for you to use such repetition, you could emphasize this in another way. Alternate translation: “with great effort” or “in very difficult circumstances” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
177 3:9 sn3k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐχ ὅτι οὐκ ἔχομεν ἐξουσίαν, ἀλλ’ 1 Paul uses a double negative to emphasize the positive. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “and we certainly have the right to receive food from you, but instead we worked for our food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
178 3:9 lrjr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἑαυτοὺς τύπον δῶμεν ὑμῖν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **example**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “we might show you the right way in order for you” or “we might demonstrate the way to live for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
179 3:9 z0up μιμεῖσθαι 1 See how you translated **imitate** in verse 7.
180 3:10 c652 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives εἴ τις οὐ θέλει ἐργάζεσθαι, μηδὲ ἐσθιέτω 1 You can state this in positive form, if this form is difficult to understand in your language. Alternate translation: “If a person wants to eat, he must work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
181 3:11 ey6c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τινας περιπατοῦντας & ἀτάκτως 1 Here, **walking** stands for behavior in life. you can use an equivalent metaphor from your culture, if it is available. Otherwise, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “some who are living idle lives” or “some who are being lazy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
182 3:11 iv1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἀλλὰ περιεργαζομένους 1 Meddlers are people who interfere in the affairs of others without being asked to help. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
183 3:12 bm6z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μετὰ ἡσυχίας 1 Here, **with quietness** is the opposite of meddling. Paul exhorts the meddlers to stop getting involved in other people’s affairs. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **quietness**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in a quiet and peaceful manner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
184 3:13 jx8t rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δέ 1 Paul here uses the word **But** to contrast the lazy believers with the hardworking believers. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Concerning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
185 3:13 e59v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὑμεῖς 1 The word **you** refers to all the Thessalonian believers, so it should be in plural form. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
186 3:13 usu9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
187 3:14 mzs4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ ἡμῶν 1 Paul is referring to his command to the Thessalonian believers as a **word**. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “our instructions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
188 3:14 nv3v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τοῦτον σημειοῦσθε 1 Paul wants the Thessalonians to notice who this person is. Alternate translation: “point out that person” or “make sure everyone knows who he is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
189 3:14 y552 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἵνα ἐντραπῇ 1 Paul instructs believers to avoid lazy believers as a disciplinary action. If necessary, you could make this explicit to make the meaning clear. Alternate translation: “in order that he will know that his laziness is wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
190 3:15 idj6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφόν 1 Although the term **brother** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
191 3:16 nef4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 16–18, Paul makes closing remarks to the believers at Thessalonica. A heading for this section might be, “Closing Remarks.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
192 3:16 z1zs rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
193 3:16 whb9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing αὐτὸς & ὁ Κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης, δῴη ὑμῖν 1 Paul ends the letter with blessings that are also prayers. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing or prayer in your language. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord of peace himself may give you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
194 3:16 zl1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς & ὁ Κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης 1 Here, **himself** emphasizes that the Lord is the source of peace and that he will personally give peace to believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
195 3:17 c2cb ὁ ἀσπασμὸς τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ, Παύλου, ὅ ἐστιν σημεῖον ἐν πάσῃ ἐπιστολῇ, οὕτως γράφω 1 Alternate translation: “I, Paul, write this greeting with my own hand, which I do in every letter, as a sign that this letter is truly from me because this is how I write”
196 3:17 e3sa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ 1 Here, the phrase **in my own hand** is an idiom meaning “in my own handwriting.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I myself am writing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
197 3:17 wg3f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὕτως γράφω 1 Paul makes it clear that this letter is from him and is not a forgery. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you could know that the letter is from me because this is how I write” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
198 3:18 h18b rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, μετὰ πάντων ὑμῶν 1 Paul ends the letter with one more blessing. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “I pray that the grace of our Lord Jesus Christ will be with you all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])